Palm Treo 700P Alltel User Guide Your Palm® Treo™ Smartphone
Palm-Treo-700P-Bell-User-Guide-777835 palm-treo-700p-bell-user-guide-777835
Palm-Treo-700P-Cellular-South-User-Guide-777837 palm-treo-700p-cellular-south-user-guide-777837
Palm-Treo-700P-Telus-User-Guide-777841 palm-treo-700p-telus-user-guide-777841
User Guide palm-treo-700p-user-guide Palm Smartphone User Guides
Treo 700p (Cellular South) - User Guide treo700pcdma_cellular_south_UG Free User Guide for Palm TREO Series Mobile Phone, Manual - page2
2015-07-27
: Palm Palm-Treo-700P-Alltel-User-Guide-777833 palm-treo-700p-alltel-user-guide-777833 palm pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 286
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
® ™ Your Palm Treo 700P Smartphone User Guide Intellectual property notices 6,490,155; 6,480,146; 6,457,134; 6,456,247; 6,442,637; 6,441,824; © 2006 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. Blazer, HotSync, Palm, Palm OS, Treo, VersaMail, and the Palm and Treo logos are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to Palm, Inc. This product contains ACCESS Co., Ltd.’s NetFront 3.0 Internet browser software. © 1996-2005 ACCESS Co., Ltd. and ACCESS Systems America, Inc. NetFront is the trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries except the United States of America. NetFront is a registered trademark of NetFront Communications, Inc. in the United States of America and is used under a license. Documents To Go is a trademark or registered trademark of DataViz, Inc. A portion of the enclosed product is © copyrighted by Fraunhofer IIS (2005). All rights reserved. All other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services of, their respective owners. 6,437,543; 6,429,625; 6,425,087; 6,389,572; 6,388,877; 6,381,650; This product is protected by one or more of the following United States patents: 6,976,226; 6,975,304; 6,965,375; 6,961,567; 6,961,029; 6,957,397; 6,952,571; 6,950,988; 6,947,975; 6,947,017; 6,943,667; 6,940,490; 6,924,752; 6,907,233; 6,906,701; 6,906,741; 6,901,276; 6,850,780; 6,845,408; 6,842,628; 6,842,335; 6,831,662; 6,819,552; 6,804,699; 6,795,710; 6,788,285; 6,781,824; 6,781,575; 6,766,490; 6,745,047; 6,363,082; 6,344,848; 6,317,085; 6,241,537; 6,222,857; 6,185,423; 6,147,314; 6,115,248; 6,064,342; D421,251; D429,252; D466,128; D478,091. Patent pending. This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304. A portion of this software includes software modules developed by the Independent JPEG group. MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary. Disclaimer and limitation of liability Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide. Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that may arise through the use of this software. Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss. 6,744,451; 6,738,852; 6,732,105; 6,724,720; 6,721,892; 6,712,638; 6,708,280; 6,697,639; 6,687,839; 6,685,328; 6,665,803; 6,618,044 ;6,590,588; 6,539,476; 6,532,148; 6,523,124; 6,519,141; 6,516,202; PN: 406-10803-00 v. 1.0 Contents Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Chapter 1: Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Treo 700P smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Setting up your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Chapter 2: Moving around on your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Chapter 3: Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Managing active calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Customizing phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 iii Chapter 4: Your email and other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Which application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 The VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Chapter 5: Your connections to the web and wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Connections with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Chapter 6: Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Camera and Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Pics & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Pocket Tunes™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Chapter 7: Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Chapter 8: Your memos and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Chapter 9: Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 iv Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Sending information with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Chapter 10: Your personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Chapter 11: Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Desktop software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Making room on your Treo smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 v Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Important safety and legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 vi Welcome Congratulations on the purchase of your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone! In one compact and indispensable device, you now have all of the following: • An advanced mobile smartphone • Mobile email (corporate and personal) • High-speed Internet connection and data transfer with 1XRTT and EVDO support • A Palm OS organizer with portable expansion capability (MultiMediaCard/ SD/SDIO) • • ® A 1.3-megapixel digital camera Text messaging • A media player • Productivity software This guide helps you set up your Treo smartphone and quickly learn to use it. NOTE Phone and text messaging services require a service contract with your wireless service provider. Web and email services require a service contract and high-speed data service from your wireless service provider. Data speeds vary based on network availability and capacity. What’s in the box? You should have received all the following items in the Treo smartphone box: Hardware • Treo smartphone • Rechargeable battery • AC charger with international adapter(s) (if required in your region) • USB sync cable • Stereo headset WELCOME 1 Documentation and software • Read This First booklet • Quick Reference • Palm Software Installation CD, which includes: • 2 • Palm® Desktop software • Bonus software for your smartphone • User Guide (this guide) • User Guide for the VersaMail Application Palm warranty WELCOME What do I need to get started? As you work through the instructions in this guide, you’ll need all the items that came in the Treo 700P smartphone box (see What’s in the box? ), as well as the following: • An activated account with your wireless service provider • A location with wireless coverage for your smartphone • An electrical outlet • The computer with which you want to synchronize your personal information • The Palm Software Installation CD included in the box CHAPT ER 1 Setting up Congratulations on the purchase of your new Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone. You’re about to discover the many things about your smartphone that will help you better manage your life and have fun, too. As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it uniquely yours. But first, take these few easy steps to set up. Benefits • Know where your smartphone controls are located • Start using your smartphone right away • Establish a link between your smartphone and your computer In this chapter Treo 700P smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Setting up your computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1 CHAPTER SETTING UP Treo 700P smartphone overview Front view Indicator light (phone and charge indicator) Earpiece 5-way navigator and Center button Power/End Applications Volume Menu Side button Send Messaging Phone Protect your screen. Be careful to store your smartphone away from items that might scratch or crush the screen. Visit www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo to find carrying cases and other useful accessories. TIP Calendar When your smartphone screen is on, you can press and hold the Side button to open an application of your choice; see Reassigning buttons for details. DID YOU KNOW? 5 CHAPTER 1 SETTING UP Back view Self-portrait mirror Battery door release Camera lens Speaker Headset jack Multi-connector Microphone IMPORTANT The Treo smartphone speaker includes a large magnet, so be sure to keep your smartphone away from credit cards or other items that could be demagnetized. 6 Top view Antenna Expansion card slot Infrared (IR) port Battery door release 1 CHAPTER SETTING UP Stylus Ringer switch DID YOU KNOW? The Ringer switch silences all sounds. When you need quiet, there’s no need to navigate menus. 2 Align the metal contacts on the battery with the contacts inside the battery compartment. 3 Insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, and then press it into place. Battery contacts Installing the battery Smartphone contacts 1 Press the battery door release, and slide the battery door downward to remove it from your smartphone. Notch 4 Slide the battery door onto the back of the smartphone until it clicks into place. 7 CHAPTER 1 SETTING UP 5 When the language selection screen appears, select the language you want to use. IMPORTANT You must select the same language on your smartphone and desktop software. 6 Follow the onscreen instructions to set up your smartphone. If your smartphone does not turn on, you need to connect it to the AC charger. If it still does not turn on after you connect the AC charger, then do a soft reset. See Performing a soft reset. TIP Charging the battery The battery comes with a sufficient charge to complete the setup process and activate your phone. After activation, we recommend charging your smartphone for 3.5 hours (or until the indicator light is solid green) to give it a full charge. See Maximizing battery life for tips on maximizing the life of your smartphone’s battery. 8 To avoid draining the battery, charge your smartphone every day, especially if you use your phone often. TIP If your battery ever becomes fully drained, your info is still stored safely on your smartphone until you recharge the battery or connect your smartphone to a power source. DID YOU KNOW? 1 If necessary, connect the international adapter to the AC charger plug. 2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet. 3 Connect the charger cable to the bottom of the smartphone. Make sure the arrow on the connector is facing up, toward the screen. DID YOU KNOW? You can also charge your smartphone by connecting it to your computer with the sync cable. You can do this with or without using the charger cable (see Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer). Keep in mind that it takes longer to charge the battery using the sync cable, and if your laptop isn’t plugged into a power source, it can drain the laptop’s battery. TIP 4 To confirm that your smartphone is charging, check the indicator light on your smartphone. • Solid red indicates that your smartphone is charging. • Solid green indicates that your smartphone is fully charged. Indicator light If the battery is fully drained, it may take a few moments for the indicator light to turn on when you begin charging. TIP 1 CHAPTER SETTING UP If the indicator light doesn’t turn on when you connect your smartphone to the AC charger, double-check the cable connection and the electrical outlet to which it is connected. TIP When your smartphone is on (see Turning your smartphone on and off), the onscreen battery icon displays the charging status: A red lightning bolt indicates that the battery is connected to a wall outlet and is charging. A green lightning bolt indicates that the battery is connected to a wall outlet and is fully charged. A partial battery without a lightning bolt indicates that the battery is not connected to a wall outlet and it has some power. An almost empty battery that is red at the bottom indicates that you need to charge the battery immediately. 9 CHAPTER 1 SETTING UP • Charge your smartphone whenever you’re at your desk, or charge it overnight. The Li-Ion battery has a much longer useful life when it is topped off frequently, versus charging it after it is fully drained. • Your smartphone’s wireless features (phone, email, messaging, and web) and media features (camera, media players, eBooks, and games) consume more power than its organizer features. If you spend a lot of time using the wireless and media features, keep an eye on the battery icon and charge when necessary. • If you don’t plan to use the wireless features on your smartphone for a while, turn off your phone (see Turning your phone on and off) and let all calls be picked up by voicemail. • As with any mobile phone, if you are in an area with no wireless coverage, your smartphone searches for a signal, which consumes power. If you cannot move to an area of better coverage, temporarily turn off your phone. While your phone is off, you can continue to use your smartphone’s nonwireless features. To see exactly how much power is left in your battery, tap the onscreen battery icon. TIP Battery icon Maximizing battery life Battery life depends on how you use your smartphone. You can maximize the life of your battery by following a few easy guidelines: You can buy an extra battery as a spare for long airplane trips or periods of heavy use. To purchase batteries that are compatible with your smartphone, go to www.palm.com/ treo700pcdma-mytreo. TIP 10 • Turn down the screen brightness (see Adjusting the brightness). • Decrease the settings in Power Preferences and turn off Beam Receive (see Optimizing power settings). • Turn off the Bluetooth feature if you’re not using it. See Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device. ® 3 If you haven’t already activated your phone, follow your wireless service provider’s activation steps before continuing. 1 CHAPTER SETTING UP 4 Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the number you want to call. Making your first call BEFORE YOU BEGIN If Phone Off appears in the title bar, you need to turn on your phone (see Turning your phone on and off). If No Service appears in the title bar, you are outside a wireless coverage area. If you believe you are in a wireless coverage area and this problem persists, contact your wireless service provider for assistance. 1 Press Phone 5 Press Send to dial. 6 After you finish the call, press Power/ End to end the call. You can also dial phone numbers with the number pad on the keyboard. See Dialing using the keyboard for details DID YOU KNOW? . 2 If prompted, press Center to turn off Keyguard (see Locking your keyboard (Keyguard) for more info). Adjusting call volume While a call is in progress, press the Volume button on the side of your smartphone to adjust the call volume. 11 CHAPTER 1 SETTING UP • To increase the volume, press the upper half of the Volume button. • To decrease the volume, press the lower half of the Volume button. Look here for your phone number Volume button If your phone number doesn’t appear in Phone Info, turn your phone off and on again before you recheck Phone Info. If your phone number still doesn’t appear, contact your wireless service provider to confirm that your phone has been activated. TIP What’s my phone number? 1 Make sure your phone is on (see Turning your phone on and off). 2 Press Phone . 3 Press Menu . 4 Select Options, and then select Phone Info. Setting up your computer BEFORE YOU BEGIN To set up your computer, you also need the sync cable that came with your smartphone. You can enter or change info on your smartphone or on your computer (using Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft 12 Outlook for Windows), and then sync to automatically update the info in both places, so there’s no need to enter the info twice. We strongly recommend that you sync your smartphone with your computer frequently to keep your info up-to-date (and backed up) in both locations. Before you can sync, you need to install the desktop synchronization software and connect the sync cable to your computer. System requirements Your computer should meet the following minimum system profiles: • • Windows 2000 or XP (or later) • 32MB of available memory (RAM) • 170MB of free hard disk space • CD drive • Available USB port Mac OS X version 10.2 or later • 128MB of total memory (RAM) • 190MB of free hard disk space • CD drive • Available USB port ® Upgrading from another Palm OS device 1 CHAPTER SETTING UP NOTE If you are setting up your first Palm OS device, skip ahead to Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer. You can transfer all compatible applications and information from your previous Palm OS® device to your new Treo 700P smartphone. This includes your calendar events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as well as your application settings and any compatible third-party applications and files. When you install the desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD, some third-party applications may be quarantined because they are not compatible with the Palm OS software version 5.4.9 on your new Treo smartphone. Quarantined files are not installed on your smartphone, nor are they deleted; these files are placed in a new folder on your computer: C:\Program Files\Palm\device name\PalmOS5 Incompatible Apps. (On some systems Palm may be replaced with palmOne or Handspring.) 13 CHAPTER 1 SETTING UP Some third-party utilities allow you to back up your old device’s information onto an expansion card and then transfer the info to your Treo 700P smartphone. We do not recommend this method because any incompatible applications are also transferred to your smartphone. TIP 1 Calculate how much space your apps and info occupy on your previous Palm OS device: 14 2 If the space occupied on your previous device is 60MB or less, then go to step 3. If the space occupied is greater than 60MB, then do any of the following to reduce the storage space you’re using before you go to the next step: • From Applications View, open the menus. • Select Info on the App menu. • At the bottom of the screen, select Size. • Delete any third-party applications that you no longer use. • Look at the numbers on the Free Space line and subtract the number on the left from the number on the right to calculate the space used. For example, on the device shown here, 22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that 4.9MB of space is occupied on this device. • Move large files, such as eBooks and images, to an expansion card. • Move third-party applications to an expansion card. • Purge old info in applications such as Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do), and email. Refer to the documentation that came with your previous device for instructions on these items. in the User list in Palm Desktop software.) 3 Synchronize your previous device with your previous desktop software to back up your information one last time. MAC ONLY If you have pictures on your 4 Install the desktop synchronization software from your new Palm Software Installation CD (see Installing the desktop synchronization software). previous device, copy them from your previous device to an expansion card or beam them to your new Treo 700P smartphone. IMPORTANT Do not synchronize your new Treo 700P smartphone with any previous versions of Palm Desktop software. 6 If you plan to continue using your previous device, perform a hard reset to remove its associated device name. (See the documentation that came with your previous device for instructions on performing a hard reset.) Each device you synchronize with your computer must have a unique name. The next time you synchronize your previous device with your computer, be sure to assign it a new name. 5 During the installation process, sync your new Treo smartphone with your new desktop software as instructed. When prompted, do the following: • Connect your new smartphone to your computer (see Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer). • Indicate whether you want to sync only the info in your PIM apps (Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and Tasks) or all info and apps (excluding apps known to be incompatible). • Select a device name for your new smartphone; be sure to select the same name that you used for your old device. (This is the name that appears 1 CHAPTER SETTING UP If any third-party applications are quarantined during the installation, do not manually install them. Contact the third-party developer for software updates and info about compatibility with your Treo 700P smartphone. 15 CHAPTER 1 SETTING UP If you have trouble upgrading, including finding the location of quarantined files, see Upgrading. TIP minimized. Your computer needs all its resources to install the software. 2 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your computer. Installing the desktop synchronization software IMPORTANT Even if you already own a Palm OS device and have installed a previous version of the desktop software, you must install the software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your Treo 700P smartphone. BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing on a computer at work, make sure your computer is configured to let you install new software. Contact your company’s IT department for help. If you want to sync info with applications other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft Outlook, you need to purchase additional third-party sync software. This sync software is sometimes called a conduit. TIP 1 Close any apps that are running on your computer, including those that are 16 3 If you are installing on a Mac, double-click the CD icon on the desktop, and then double-click the PalmSoftware.pkg icon. 4 When the installation wizard opens, follow the onscreen instructions. Please note these important points about the installation process: • When the language selection screen appears, click the same language you selected on your smartphone. • You can choose which desktop software you want to use for synchronization: Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook (Windows only). NOTE If you use Microsoft Outlook as your desktop email application, select Microsoft Outlook as your desktop synchronization software. If you select Microsoft Outlook, Palm Desktop software still installs on your computer. When you enter information on your computer, be sure to enter your information in Microsoft Outlook not in Palm Desktop software. • When the install process prompts you to connect your smartphone to your computer, go to Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer. Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer 1 If necessary, connect the international adapter to the AC charger plug. For best performance, plug your sync cable directly into a USB port on your computer. If your computer has USB ports on both the front and back, we suggest using the back port; the front port is often a low-power port. If you use a USB hub, make sure the hub has its own power supply. TIP 1 CHAPTER SETTING UP 4 With the sync button facing up, connect the sync cable to the bottom of your smartphone. Do not press the sync button until you are instructed to do so. 5 Connect the charger cable to the connector on the sync cable. Sync cable Sync button 2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet. 3 Plug the USB sync cable into an available USB port or a powered USB hub on your computer. You are now ready to synchronize; go to Synchronizing information—the basics. 17 CHAPTER 1 SETTING UP Synchronizing information—the basics info up-to-date (and backed up) in both locations. The info from all the following applications is updated by default each time you sync your smartphone with your desktop software: Synchronizing means that info that is entered or updated in one place (your smartphone or your computer) is automatically updated in the other, so there’s no need to enter the info twice. We strongly recommend that you sync your smartphone with your computer or corporate server frequently to keep your 18 How each application syncs depends on your computer type and the desktop software you are using, as follows: Computer type Desktop type What syncs and where Windows Microsoft Outlook • Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and Tasks sync with Outlook • Pics&Videos syncs with Palm Desktop Windows Palm Desktop All apps sync with Palm Desktop Mac Palm Desktop All apps sync with Palm Desktop BEFORE YOU BEGIN To sync your info, you must install Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your Treo 700P smartphone—even if you sync with Outlook or another third-party application. See Installing the desktop synchronization software for instructions. 3 A message indicates that synchronization is in progress. 1 CHAPTER SETTING UP 4 Wait for a message that indicates that the process is complete before you disconnect the sync cable. If you have problems synchronizing, see Synchronization for suggestions. TIP For more sync options, including which apps sync, see Synchronizing information— advanced. TIP 1 Connect your Treo 700P smartphone to your computer (see Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer). NOTE If you’re performing initial setup, your smartphone should already be connected to your computer. 2 Press the sync button on the sync cable. Sync button If you’re finishing your initial setup, you now have the option to install bonus software from the Palm Software Installation CD. If you choose to install some of the bonus software, you need to sync again to install the software on your smartphone. You can also install bonus software later, see Installing bonus software from the CD. For info on locating your pictures and videos on your computer, see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer. TIP 19 CHAPTER 1 20 SETTING UP CHAPT ER 2 Moving around on your smartphone Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your smartphone is similar. Most Palm OS® applications use the same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these controls on your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone, you’ll be driving all over town and you won’t even need a map. Benefits • Find and open applications quickly • Access extra features with menus • Move around in applications with one hand, using the 5-way navigator • Access many more characters and symbols than are displayed on the keyboard In this chapter Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Moving around the screen Some third-party applications may not work with the 5-way navigator, and you must use the stylus instead. TIP 2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE In this guide, we use arrow icons to indicate directions on the 5-way. These are different from any onscreen arrows that you tap with your stylus or select with the 5-way to display pick lists. DID YOU KNOW? To move around the Treo 700P smartphone screen, you can use the 5-way navigator for one-handed navigation, or you can tap items on the screen with the stylus. With use, you will find your own favorite way to scroll, highlight, and select menu items. The 5-way includes the following buttons: Center Up Left Right Down 23 CHAPTER 2 MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE Up or Down at a time. Scrolling through screens As on a computer, you scroll on the Treo smartphone to move from field to field or page to page, or in some cases to highlight an item or option in a list. You can also scroll using the stylus. Tap an onscreen scroll arrow, or drag the slider of an onscreen scroll bar. In list screens, use the 5-way to select and move between entries such as notes, memos, contacts, or photos. In individual entry screens—such as a single photo or email message—use the 5-way to move among the items on the screen or to move to another entry. The behavior of the 5-way for list screens and entry screens varies according to application. Here are some general scrolling tips that apply in most applications: 24 • Press Right , Left , Up , or Down to move to the next field, button, or action in that direction. • In list screens, press and hold Up or Down to scroll one screen at a time. • When inside a text field, press Right or Left to scroll to the next character or word, press Up or Down to scroll between lines, or press and hold to scroll one screen Slider Scroll arrows Highlighting and selecting items On most screens, one item—a button, a list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by default. The highlight identifies which item is affected by your next action. Use the 5-way to move the highlight from one item to another before opening or selecting it. The highlight can take one of two forms, depending on what is highlighted: • Border glow: When an onscreen button (such as OK or Cancel) or pick list is highlighted, the item displays a glow around its border. If an entire list screen 2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE is highlighted, the glow appears at the top and bottom of the screen only. When a border appears at the top and bottom of a list screen, press Center on the 5-way to highlight the first item in the list. TIP After you open an application (see Opening applications), experiment with using the 5-way to highlight various screen elements. TIP Highlighting text You can use the stylus to highlight text on the screen. • • Tap and drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight. • To highlight a word, double-tap it. • To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it. Colored background: When a phone Accessing command buttons number, text, an email address, a web link, or an item in a list is highlighted, the item is displayed as white text against a colored background. Examples of lists include the Contacts list, the Messaging Inbox, and the Tasks list. In most applications, command buttons such as New, OK, and Details appear at the bottom of the screen. In many cases, you can jump directly to these buttons instead of scrolling to them. After highlighting an item, you can select or activate it by pressing Center , or by tapping the item with the stylus. • From a list screen, such as the Contacts list or Memos list, press Right to jump to the first button. 25 CHAPTER 2 MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE • From a screen where you create or edit entries, such as Edit Contacts, press Center to jump to the first button. • From a dialog box, such as Edit Categories, press Up or Down scroll to the buttons. to Dialog box A set of options and command buttons that are enclosed by a border and that enable you to carry out a specific task. KEY TERM Selecting menu items Many applications have menus to give you access to additional features. These menus are usually hidden from view, but they appear when you press Menu . To get the most out of your Treo smartphone, it’s a good idea to familiarize yourself with the additional features available through the various application menus. 1 Press Menu to display an application’s menus. 26 Menu shortcut 2 Press Right and Left between menus. to switch 3 Press Up and Down menu item. to highlight a 4 Press Center to select the menu item, or press Menu to close the menu and cancel your selection. Most menu items have menu shortcuts listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut, press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t have to see the menu item to use the menu shortcut. For example, when you’re in Calendar, you can press Menu + N to create a new event. TIP Selecting options in a pick list • A range of options is often presented in a type of menu called a pick list, which can be identified by a downward-pointing arrow. Pick lists are different from the application menus previously described. The application menus give you access to additional features and pick lists let you select the contents for a particular field. Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick list. • Tap the item you want from the list. • To exit the pick list without making a selection, tap outside the list. 2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE You can select items from a pick list with the 5-way or the stylus. • 5-way: Use the 5-way to highlight the pick list, and then press Center to display the items in the list. • Press Up and Down the item you want. to highlight • Press Center to select the highlighted item. • To exit the pick list without making a selection, press Left or Right . 27 CHAPTER 2 MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE Using the keyboard Backlight Backspace Option Return Shift/Find Menu Space 28 Alt • When using the keyboard, most people find it easiest to hold the Treo smartphone with two hands and use the tips of both thumbs to press the keys. TIP DID YOU KNOW? The Treo smartphone includes a keyboard backlight that turns on and off when the screen turns on or off. The backlight also dims when an active call lasts longer than a specified period of time. See Optimizing power settings to adjust the automatic shut-off and dimming intervals. Entering lowercase and uppercase letters • To enter lowercase letters, press the desired keys. • To enter an uppercase letter, press Shift/Find and then press a letter key. You don’t need to press and hold Shift while entering a letter. When Shift is active, an up arrow appears in the lower-right corner of the screen. To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/Find twice. To turn it off, press Shift/ Find once. When Caps Lock is on, an underlined up arrow appears in the lower-right corner of the screen. 2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE Entering numbers, punctuation, and symbols Numbers, punctuation, and symbols appear above the letters on the keys. To enter these characters, do one of the following: Symbol Letter • Press Option , and then press the key with the desired character shown above the letter. You don’t need to press and hold Option while pressing the second key. When Option is active, the symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the screen. 29 CHAPTER 2 MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE • To turn Option Lock on, press Option twice. To turn it off, press Option once. When Option Lock is on, the symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the screen. DID YOU KNOW? Some application views automatically default to Option Lock, such as the Dial Pad View in the Phone application or the Calculator. In this case, you do not need to press Option to enter numbers. 1 Enter the character that corresponds to the symbol or accented character you want. See the table on the next page. 2 Press Alt 4 Press Center character. Symbols and accented characters that do not appear on the keyboard are sometimes called alternate characters because they are entered using the Alt key. 30 to insert the Alternate characters are grouped by their similarity to the base key. For example, the alternate characters for the e key are é, è, ë, ê, and . DID YOU KNOW? Entering other symbols and accented characters . 3 Press Up , Down , Right , or Left to highlight the desired character. 0 Symbols and accented characters Enter… Then press Alt to select… Enter… Then press Alt to select… Enter… Then press Alt to select… a áàäâãåæ n ñ u úùüû A ÁÀÄÂÃÅÆ N Ñ U ÚÙÜÛ b or B ß o óòöôœõ x or X x¤ c 碩 O ÓÒÖÔŒÕ y ýÿ C Ç¢© p or P ¶ Y ÝŸ e éèëê r or R ® ! ¡ E ÉÈËÊ s ßš ? ¿ i íìïî S ߊ : :-) :-( ;-) I ÍÌÏÎ t or T ™ $ l or L £ Press Alt characters: 2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE £¥¢ by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these ;_•\%=°÷ £¥¢[]{}<>«»©®™~^ø| 31 CHAPTER 2 MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE Opening applications Button Primary application Phone When you open an application using either Applications View or an application button, you automatically close the application you were previously using. Calendar Messaging Using the quick buttons The front of the Treo 700P smartphone has three buttons that you can use to open applications. The fourth button opens Applications View (see Using Applications View). You can customize the quick buttons yourself; see Reassigning buttons for details. • To access a button’s secondary application, press Option and then press the quick button. Buttons Secondary application + Web + World Clock + Email TIP Phone Calendar Applications Messaging DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Option + Menu dims your smartphone screen. Each quick button opens two applications: • 32 To access a button’s primary application, simply press the button. Using Applications View You can access all available applications through Applications View. 1 Press Applications In Applications View, you can also do any of the following: • Press Applications repeatedly to cycle through various categories of applications. See Applications settings for more info on categories. • Enter the first few letters of the application’s name to highlight it. For example, if you enter P it highlights Phone; if you then enter R, it highlights Prefs. If you pause and then enter R, it highlights the first application that starts with R. . 2 Use the 5-way to highlight the application you want to use. 3 Press Center application. 2 CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE to open the selected 33 CHAPTER 2 34 MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE CHAPT ER 3 Your phone The Phone application is your home base for making and receiving calls and for storing info about the people you need to stay in touch with. You can creatively manage multiple calls, such as swapping between calls, sending text messages to ignored calls, and creating three-way conference calls. Your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone helps you perform all these tasks with ease. And you can do more than manage your phone calls, too. You can send text messages, open applications, go to your favorite web pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find out how many unread email messages you have. Benefits • Stay in touch—you choose how • Save time with shortcuts to your favorite info • Have fun: add wallpaper and ringtones In this chapter Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Managing active calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Customizing phone settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Turning your smartphone on and off example, when you’re on a plane and want to look at your calendar. 1 Press and release Power/End wake up the screen. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE to You can also press any of the quick buttons or the Applications button to wake up your smartphone screen. TIP NOTE Throughout this guide we use the term smartphone to describe your device and its physical aspects. We use the term phone to describe the feature of your smartphone that lets you connect to your wireless service provider’s network to make and receive calls and transmit data. The phone and the screen of your smartphone can be turned off and on separately. This means that you can wake up the screen to use just the organizer features of your smartphone, without turning on the phone. Also, when the screen is turned off, the phone can be on and ready for you to receive and make calls. Power/End Center 2 Press Center to turn off Keyguard. For more info about turning Keyguard on and off, see Locking your keyboard (Keyguard). 3 Press and release Power/End turn off the screen. to Waking up the screen Wake up the screen and leave the phone turned off when you want to use only the organizer features of your smartphone; for You can set how long the screen stays on. Press Applications, select Preferences, select Power, and then adjust the Auto-off after setting. TIP 37 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE your wireless service provider’s name and the Signal Strength icon appear at the top of the screen, indicating that you can use the phone and Internet features (if supported by the mobile network). Turning your phone on and off When your phone is on, it is connected to your wireless service provider’s network (provided you are in a coverage area) so that you can make and receive phone calls and use wireless services, such as email, messaging, and the web browser. During initial setup, your phone is on by default, so you can use wireless services right away. If you turn off your phone, you can still use the organizer features such as Contacts and Calendar, as well as the media features, such as the pTunes music application and Pics&Videos. This is sometimes referred to as flight mode and is ideal for airplane flights and maximizing battery life. 1 Wake up the screen. 2 Press and hold Power/End turn on your phone. 3 Press and hold Power/End again to turn off your phone. When your phone is off, Phone Off appears at the top of the Phone application screen and your smartphone is not connected to any mobile network. You can still use the nonwireless features of your smartphone, such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos. to If the Ringer switch is in the Sound On position, you hear a series of tones when you turn your phone on and off (see Silencing sounds). TIP When your smartphone locates a signal (provided you are in a coverage area), 38 If you’re outside a coverage area, No Service appears in the upper-left corner. TIP Opening the Phone application • Press Phone to open the Main View of the Phone application. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE Status icons Dial Pad Favorite buttons Making calls 3 Tap Dial or press Send the call. to make If you changed the wallpaper in the Main View of the Phone application (see Customizing the Main View in the Phone application), you can still access the Dial Pad. From the Main View of the Phone application, press Send, and then select Dial Pad. TIP Your smartphone offers several options for making calls. As you become familiar with your smartphone, you’ll discover which method you prefer. Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad 1 Press Phone . 2 Enter the phone number by tapping the onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus. You can paste numbers directly into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from another application and press Phone to switch to the Dial Pad. Open the Edit menu and select Paste. Press Send to dial. DID YOU KNOW? Dialing using the keyboard 1 Press Phone . 2 Press the numbered keys to enter the phone number. (You don’t need to press Option.) 39 YOUR PHONE CHAPTER 3 • Last name (SMI for Smith) • First initial and last name (JSM for John Smith) For example, entering SM would display Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and Sally Martin. Entering JSM finds only John Smith. 3 Press Send to make the call. Text appears here as you enter it You can also press Center on the 5-way to make the call. TIP Dialing by contact name Before you can dial a call by contact name, you must create some contacts (see Adding a contact), or import them by synchronizing (see Synchronizing information—the basics). 1 Press Phone . 2 Select the Contacts favorite button. 3 Using the keyboard, just start entering one of the following for the contact you want to call: • 40 First name (JOH for John) To restart your search, press Backspace to delete letters you’ve entered. Or select Cancel to return to the Main View. TIP 4 Select the number you want to dial. 5 Press Send to dial. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE DID YOU KNOW? If you want to be able to dial by entering a contact name in the Main View of the Phone application (instead of a phone number), you can change a setting to do that (see Customizing phone settings). To see more info for a contact, highlight the name and press Center on the 5-way to view the address, company, and other details. TIP Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button Your smartphone comes with a few predefined speed-dial favorite buttons, but you can also create your own favorites. See Creating a speed-dial favorite button. 1 Press Phone 2 Press Down . to access Favorites. 3 Use the 5-way to highlight the speed-dial favorite you want. Look for the icon to distinguish a speed-dial favorite from other types of favorites. To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly press Down or Right on the 5-way to scroll to other Favorites pages. TIP If you select a contact from your Contacts list when you create a speed-dial favorite, you can see all the numbers for that contact. Highlight that contact’s speed-dial favorite button and press Space on the keyboard. DID YOU KNOW? 4 Press Center to make the call. Dialing from a web page or message Your smartphone recognizes most phone numbers that appear on web pages or in text or email messages. 1 Select the phone number on the web page or in the message. 41 YOUR PHONE CHAPTER 3 want to call, and then press Send again to dial. 2 Press Center to open the Dial Number dialog box. 3 Select Dial to dial the number. If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to highlight and dial a phone number on a web page or in a message, it means that your smartphone doesn’t recognize the number as a phone number. TIP Redialing a recently called number To dial the last number: From the Main View in the Phone application, press and hold Send to dial the last number you called. To select from your most recently dialed numbers: From the Main View in the Phone application, press Send to open the Redial list, select the number you 42 To select from a chronological list of calls: Select the Call Log favorite button. You can also access the Call Log from the Main View in the Phone application by pressing Send and selecting Call Log from the Redial list. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE DID YOU KNOW? If an entry in your Call Log supports text messaging, you can send a text message to that number. Highlight the entry in your Call Log, open the Record menu, and then select Message to address a message to the selected number. Receiving calls See a photo of the person calling you! Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in Assigning a caller ID photo. TIP To receive calls, your phone must be on. This is different from having only the screen turned on (see Turning your phone on and off). When your phone is off, your calls go to voicemail. DID YOU KNOW? If music is playing and a call arrives, the phone rings softly. The music pauses automatically if you answer the call and resumes when you hang up. To answer a call, do one of the following: • Press Send • Select Answer. . • Press the headset button (if the headset is attached). The headset button may work differently on headsets other than the one provided with your smartphone. TIP To ignore a call, do one of the following: Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/ End or select Ignore. 43 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE Send the caller a text message: Select Ignore with Text. This option sends the call to voicemail and opens a text message addressed to the caller. NOTE Sending text messages to land line phones may not be supported. To silence the phone while it is ringing, do one of the following: • Press any key on your smartphone except Send, Power/End, or the 5-way. • Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound Off position. This immediately silences all system sounds, including the ringer. DID YOU KNOW? When you silence the ringer while it is ringing, you can either answer the call or let it ring through to voicemail. Using voicemail Your wireless service provider service includes voicemail. Keep in mind that airtime and other charges apply when using voicemail from your smartphone. 44 Setting up voicemail 1 Make sure your phone is turned on (see Turning your phone on and off). 2 Press Phone . 3 Press and hold 1 or select the Voicemail favorite button to dial your wireless service provider’s automated voicemail system. 4 Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail. Voicemail notification When you have a new voicemail message, you are notified with an Alert dialog box. • To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select OK. • To play the message, select Listen. When you have messages that you have not listened to, a Voicemail icon also appears in the title bar of the Phone application. You can select this icon to listen to your voicemail. If the voicemail icon stays in the title bar after you listen to your messages, you can clear the voicemail icon. Open the Options menu, select Phone Preferences, and then select Clear Voicemail Icon. TIP 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE Managing active calls Listening to voicemail messages 1 Press Phone . 2 Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail system, or select the Voicemail favorite button. 3 Enter your voicemail password using the keyboard. Remember, you do not need to press Option to enter numbers, *, or # while on a call. TIP When you make or receive a call, Active Call View appears. Call duration Caller’s name and number NOTE If you defined Extra Digits for the Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a favorite button for details), you can select this button to enter your password. 45 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE If the screen dims during a call, press any key except Power/End to restore the screen brightness. Be careful not to press Power/End to restore the screen brightness because this ends the call. TIP DID YOU KNOW? You can set how long the screen stays at full brightness during phone calls. See Optimizing power settings for details. Use the 5-way or stylus to select the onscreen buttons.Here’s what the buttons do: Ends the call immediately. You can also press the headset button (if the headset is attached). Turns on the speakerphone. When the speakerphone is on, you can take the smartphone away from your ear and use other features during a call. For example, you can check your calendar or look up contact info. Turns off the speakerphone when it is on. 46 Replaces the Spkr-phone button when a Bluetooth headset is attached. Select this button to transfer the call from the Bluetooth® headset to the built-in earpiece. Places the current call on hold. Enables you to place another call while the first call is on hold. For information on handling a second incoming call, see Answering a second call (call waiting). Opens the Dial Pad so you can manually dial additional numbers, such as an extension or a response to a voice prompt. Dials any extra digits (such as a password or an extension) that you assigned to a favorite button. This button replaces the Dial Pad button during outgoing calls to numbers that include predefined extra digits. See Defining favorite buttons for information on defining extra digits. Mutes the microphone so that you cannot be heard. DID YOU KNOW? Do you accidentally press onscreen buttons when you’re on a call? You can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during active calls; see Locking your screen. Ending a call Switching applications during a call 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE You can use many other applications on your smartphone while holding a phone conversation, including the organizer and text messaging features. You cannot, however, make a data connection while on a call. This means that you cannot browse the web or send and receive email messages while on a call. 1 (Optional) If you want to continue talking while viewing another application, select Spkr-phone or connect a headset (see Using a phone headset). 2 Press Applications . 3 Select the icon for the application you want to open. 4 When you’re ready to leave the app, press Phone to return to Active Call View. Do one of the following: • Press Power/End . • Select Hang Up All. • Press the button on the headset (if the headset is attached). TIP You can also press Phone to toggle between Active Call View and Main View in the Phone app, so you can access a favorite during a call. 47 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE Saving phone numbers After you complete an outgoing call to a number that is not in your Contacts list, you are prompted to add the number to your Contacts list. You are also prompted to add new numbers from incoming calls with caller ID. • To disable the Add New Number prompt, check the Don’t ask me this again box. You can turn the Add New Number prompt on and off. From the Main View in the Phone app, open the Options menu, and select Phone Preferences. To turn this option on, check the Ask to add unknown phone numbers after calls box. To turn this option off, uncheck this box. TIP If you don’t add a number right away, follow these steps to add it later. 1 In the Call Log (see Redialing a recently called number), highlight the number you want to save. • • • 48 To create a new contact entry for this number, select Create a New Contact, and enter the contact’s info. To add this number to an existing contact entry, select Add to a Contact, and then select the contact. This pastes the number into the first available phone number field for that contact. To decline adding this number, select Cancel. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Add Contact. 4 Enter the information for the entry. 5 Select Done. Making a second call You can make a second call while your first call is still active. 1 Dial the first number and wait until the person answers. 2 Select Hold. When the second call is an outgoing call, you can conference the two calls, but you cannot swap between them. DID YOU KNOW? 3 Select Add Call. 4 Dial the second number using any of the methods described in Making calls. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE When the second call is an incoming call, you can swap between the two calls, but you cannot conference them. 5 When the Dial another call prompt appears, select Yes. When two calls are active and you press Power/End, you hang up both calls. If the second call is an outgoing call, you can return to the first call by waiting for the person on the second call to hang up. If you accidentally hang up both calls, your smartphone automatically dials the number that was on hold. When two calls are active, Active Call View includes two status lines, each representing one of the calls. Answering a second call (call waiting) When you are on a call, you can receive a second call. When the second call comes in, you hear a call waiting tone and the Call Waiting dialog box appears. You can do any of the following to handle the second call: • To place the current call on hold and answer the new call, press Send or select Answer. • To send the new call to voicemail, select Ignore. 49 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE • To send the new call to voicemail and send the caller a text message, select Ignore with Text. • To hang up the current call and answer the new call, press Power/End . After you answer a second call, you can switch between the original call and the second call by selecting Swap. Making a conference call When you are on a call and place a second outgoing call, you can join the two calls in a conference session, provided that the service is available in your area. Please contact your wireless service provider for more information. Additional charges may apply and minutes in your mobile account may be deducted for each call you place. 1 While the first call is active, place a second call. 2 Select Conf. This joins the two active calls in a conference session. 50 3 To end the conference, press Power/ End to end all the calls. DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Send during a conference call usually hangs up the second call. However, depending on your network connection, you may occasionally hang up the first call. using any of the methods described in Making calls. Using Flash mode during a call Flash mode enables you to manually manage your calls while one or more calls are active. This mode is often used during a conference call when one of the calls has ended but the other remains connected. 1 Press Send View. • If you have one active call and place an outgoing second call, press Send after establishing a connection with the second party to set up a conference session using three-way calling. • If you have two calls in conference, press Send to hang up one of the calls; you can then dial another number and place the new caller into the conference session. from Active Call 2 If the Do you want to switch to Flash mode prompt appears, select Yes. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE 4 To exit Flash mode and end all the calls, press Power/End . Forwarding calls 3 While in Flash mode, do any of the following: • • If you have one active call and answer an incoming second call, press Send to swap between the calls. If you have one active call, to make an outgoing second call, dial the number You can forward calls to another phone number. Please check with your wireless service provider about availability and pricing of forwarded calls; call forwarding is not available in all areas, and additional charges may apply. 1 Press Phone . 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Options, and then select Phone Preferences. 51 YOUR PHONE CHAPTER 3 Defining favorite buttons Your Treo smartphone provides 70 favorite buttons for quick access to the following common tasks: 4 Select the Call Forwarding pick list and select the forwarding number. NOTE If the forwarding number isn’t in the pick list, select Edit numbers, and then select New. Enter a 10-digit forwarding number (without spaces), and then select OK. Now select the number from the Call Forwarding pick list. • Dialing a phone number (speed dial) • Accessing your Call Log • Accessing the onscreen Dial Pad • Opening an application • Accessing a web page • Addressing a text or email message • Accessing voicemail (preset on your Treo smartphone) 5 Select OK. 6 Call your smartphone to confirm that call forwarding is active. Your wireless service provider may preset favorite buttons on your smartphone that 52 are customized for their services, and you may not be able to edit or delete these preset favorite buttons. However, you can always customize the remaining favorite buttons to perform any of the supported tasks. If you’re upgrading from a previous Treo smartphone, your favorites may be transferred along with your other info. However, you may need to rearrange the order in which your favorites appear by opening the Record menu and then selecting Edit Favorites Pages. DID YOU KNOW? 3 Enter a label for the favorite: • If the entry is for an existing contact, select Lookup. Start entering the last name of the contact, and select the contact when it appears in the lookup list. • If the entry is for a new contact, enter the label, press Down , and enter the number. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE DID YOU KNOW? You can assign a special ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller ID ringtone for details. Creating a speed-dial favorite button 1 Press Phone 2 Use the 5-way favorite button. . to select a blank If there are no blank buttons on the current Favorites page, press Right on the 5-way to scroll through the other pages. If all your favorites are full, you can delete a favorite to make room for a new one (see Deleting a favorite button). TIP 4 (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which you can press and hold from the Phone application to instantly dial this speed-dial number. 5 (Optional) Select More, and then select advanced options: Extra Digits: Defines additional digits to dial, such as a password or extension. To enter a one-second pause, insert a 53 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE comma between digits. To add a longer pause, enter more commas. Dial Extra Digits Automatically: Dials predefined extra digits immediately after dialing the phone number, when checked. When creating a Message or Email favorite, you can enter multiple addresses; simply separate each address with a comma. This is an easy way to send messages to a group of people. DID YOU KNOW? Editing a favorite button 6 Select OK. 1 Press Phone Creating other types of favorite buttons 1 Press Phone 2 Use the 5-way Favorites. . to access to access 3 Highlight the favorite button you want to edit. 3 Select a blank button. 4 Press Menu 4 Select the Types pick list and select Call Log, Dial Pad, Application, Message, Email, or Web Link. 5 Select Edit Favorites Button on the Record menu. 5 Enter a label for the favorite and enter any other necessary information on the screen. 6 (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which you can press and hold to open the favorite from the Phone application. 7 Select OK. 54 . 2 Use the 5-way Favorites. . 6 Make the desired changes. For example, you can add a Quick Key, which you can press and hold to instantly open the favorite from the Phone application. 7 Select OK. You can also organize your buttons on various Favorites pages. Open the Record menu and select Edit Favorites Pages. Drag and drop the buttons into a new slot. To move a favorite to another page, drag the button onto the page icon at the bottom of the screen. TIP Deleting a favorite button 1 Press Phone . 2 Use the 5-way Favorites. to access 3 Highlight the favorite button you want to delete. 4 Press Menu . 5 Select Edit Favorites Button on the Record menu. Using a phone headset You can connect a phone headset for hands-free operation. If you need to use your phone while driving and this is permitted in your area, we recommend using a phone headset (wired stereo headset included) or a hands-free car kit (sold separately). In addition to the stereo headset included with your Treo smartphone, your smartphone is compatible with the following types of headsets that are sold separately: • Wired headsets with a 2.5mm connector (3-pin or 4-pin) • Wireless headsets and car kits enabled with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless technology 6 Select Delete. 7 Select OK. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE The headset designed for Treo 180/270/ 300 devices is not compatible with your Treo 700P smartphone. TIP 55 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE Check the specifications for your headset or car kit to confirm compatibility. When in doubt, ask the manufacturer if the product is compatible with Treo 700P smartphones. To find compatible hands-free devices, go to www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo. Using a wired headset Headset button Microphone NOTE You cannot use a headset with Bluetooth wireless technology to listen to music files. Speakers If you want to use a stereo headset with a 3.5mm connector to listen to music files, then you need to purchase a 2.5mm stereo adapter. Visit www.palm.com/ treo700pcdma-mytreo for more info on audio accessories. TIP When using the headset that is included with your smartphone, you can press the headset button to perform any of the following tasks: • Answer an incoming call • Answer a call-waiting call • Pick up a call that is on hold • Switch between two calls (if the second call is incoming) • Join two calls in a conference (if the second call is outgoing) • Hang up all active calls The headset button may work differently on other headsets. TIP 56 Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for example, your smartphone and a hands-free device—that can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. Once you form a partnership with a device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that device again. Partnership is also known as paired relationship, pairing, trusted device, and trusted pair. Once you set up a partnership with a Bluetooth headset or car kit, you can communicate with that device whenever it is turned on and within range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet/10 meters in optimum environmental conditions. Performance and range may be reduced by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors. If you hear a headset buzz or experience poor microphone performance, your headset may be incompatible with your smartphone. TIP BEFORE YOU BEGIN Prepare your headset or car kit to accept a connection from another Bluetooth device. See the documentation that came with your hands-free device for instructions. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE 1 Press Applications and select Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth icon in the title bar. 2 Select Bluetooth On. 3 (Optional) Enter a device name that identifies your smartphone when it is discovered by other Bluetooth devices. NOTE Use the same device name for all your Bluetooth connections. If you change the device name, you need to recreate any partnerships you already created. 4 Select Setup Devices. 57 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE 5 Select Hands-free Setup. 7 After you finish setting up the device, select Done to return to Trusted Devices View. NOTE For some car kits, you need to initiate a Bluetooth connection from your smartphone to complete the partnership process. To do this, highlight the car kit in Trusted Devices View, press Menu , and then select Connect. 6 Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership with the specific hands-free device. When prompted, enter a passkey. IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices have a predefined passkey; if so, you can find the passkey in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and your hands-free device. We recommend that where possible, you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. 58 8 (Optional) Enable advanced hands-free features by pressing the multifunction button (MFB) on the hands-free device. You can tell the connection is successful when you see a light blue headset icon in the title bar of the Phone application. You can now use your smartphone with the Bluetooth hands-free device. Using a Bluetooth hands-free device After you create a partnership with your Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it on within range (up to 30 feet/10 meters), your smartphone automatically routes all calls to the hands-free device instead of to the earpiece on your smartphone. When a call comes in, your smartphone rings and the hands-free device beeps. Even if you answer the call on your smartphone, the call goes to the hands-free device. If you prefer to route calls to the earpiece on your smartphone, you can change the settings on your smartphone to do this; see Customizing advanced settings for your hands-free device. If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free device and you want to return to the earpiece during a call, select Cancel Bluetooth in Active Call View. To return the call to the hands-free device, open the Options menu and select Connect Bluetooth. TIP The features of your hands-free device vary by model. Check the documentation for your hands-free device for details about these features. Your smartphone can support the following actions, provided that your hands-free device also supports them: • Transfer a call from the earpiece on your smartphone to the hands-free device • Ignore an incoming call • Redial the last number you called from the hands-free device 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE If you have more than one Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you connected to becomes the active device. To switch between devices, disconnect the active device before you try to connect to the other device. DID YOU KNOW? Customizing advanced settings for your hands-free device You can set whether your hands-free device automatically answer calls, provided the device supports this feature. 1 Press Applications Prefs . • Answer an incoming call 2 Select Hands-free. • Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting call 3 Do one of the following: • Place a call on hold and answer a call-waiting call • Hang up a single call and select To send all calls to your hands-free device: Check the Always route calls to handsfree box. Select the Auto answer pick list and select whether you want your hands-free device to 59 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE automatically answer incoming calls and how quickly it answers. To choose between the earpiece on your smartphone and your hands-free device on a call-by-call basis: Uncheck the Always route calls to handsfree box. When the phone rings, you can answer the call with your hands-free device by pressing the multifunction button on your hands-free device, or you can answer the call with the earpiece on your smartphone by using the controls on your smartphone (see Receiving calls). Selecting ringtones You can set various tones for various types of incoming calls. 1 Press Phone . 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences. 4 Select the Application pick list and select Ring Tones. 4 Select Done. Customizing phone settings You can download any compatible ringtone directly to your smartphone (see Downloading files from a web page). You can also download ringtones to your computer and then email them to your smartphone. DID YOU KNOW? 60 5 Select the Volume pick list and select the volume level. 6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select how you want your smartphone to vibrate upon an incoming call. 7 (Optional) Uncheck the Escalate ring tone volume box if you want the ring to remain at the same volume regardless of how long it rings. 8 Select ringtones from the following pick lists: Known Caller: An incoming call from someone in your Contacts or Favorites. 3 Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences. 4 Select Manage. 5 Do one of the following: • To record a sound, select New. • To play a sound, select it with the 5-way . • To delete a sound, highlight it and press Backspace . • To send a sound, highlight it and select Send. Unknown Caller: An incoming call from someone identified by caller ID who is not in your Contacts or Favorites. Roaming: A special tone for incoming calls when you’re outside your home mobile network. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE 6 Select Done twice. 9 Select Done. You can also create a new sound by selecting New in Sound & Alerts Preferences. TIP You can assign a ringtone to a contact or an entire category of contacts. Ringtones assigned to individual contacts override the ringtone assigned to a category of contacts. DID YOU KNOW? Selecting Phone alert tones You can set various tones for various types of alerts. Creating and managing ringtones 1 Press Phone . You can also record sounds and use them as ringtones. 2 Press Menu . 1 Press Phone . 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences. 4 Select the Application pick list and select Phone Alerts. 61 YOUR PHONE CHAPTER 3 Adjusting call volume While a call is in progress, press the Volume button on the side of your smartphone to adjust the call volume. 5 Select the Volume pick list and select the volume level. 6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select how you want your smartphone to vibrate upon an incoming call. 7 Select alert tones from the following pick lists: Voicemail Alert: Indicates that a new voicemail message has arrived. Coverage in/out: Indicates that you moved into or out of a coverage area. Volume button Side button Adjusting ringer volume When a call is not in progress and music is not playing, press the Volume button on the side of your Treo smartphone to adjust ringer volume, and then press the Side button to confirm your selection. Signal faded: Indicates that the signal lost strength and a call was dropped. 8 Select Done. Assigning a caller ID photo 1 Press Phone . 2 Select the Contacts favorite button. 3 Open the contact to whom you want to give a caller ID photo. 62 4 Select Edit. If you assign pictures to your contacts in Microsoft Outlook or ® Palm Desktop software and you install the desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD, the pictures are automatically added to your contact entries on your smartphone when you sync. If you use third-party synchronization software, picture sync may not be supported. Check with the software developer for information. DID YOU KNOW? 5 Select the Picture box and do one of the following: • Select Camera to take a photo and add it to this contact entry when you save the photo. • Select Photos and select an existing photo that you want to assign to this contact. 6 Select Done. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE Assigning a caller ID ringtone Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is calling before you even look at your smartphone. This is a great way to identify calls from important people in your life and to screen calls you’d prefer not answer. 1 Press Phone . 2 Select the Contacts favorite button. 3 Open the contact to whom you want to give a caller ID ringtone. 4 Select Edit. 5 Select the Ringtone pick list and select a tone for this contact entry. 63 YOUR PHONE CHAPTER 3 3 Select Options, and then select Phone Display Options. 4 Set any of the following options: Show… : Sets whether the Dial Pad or wallpaper appears in the Main View of the Phone application. If you select Show Wallpaper, select the thumbnail image and then select an image to use as wallpaper. 6 Select OK. If you select the Show Wallpaper option, you can still access the Dial Pad. From the Phone application’s Main View, press Send to open the Redial list, and then select Dial Pad. TIP You can assign a ringtone to an entire category of contacts. For example, use a special ringtone for categories such as Family, Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner and select Edit Categories. Select the category, and then select the ringtone on the Edit Category screen. TIP Customizing the Main View in the Phone application Phone Display Options let you customize the appearance and entry mode of the Main View in the Phone application. 64 1 Press Phone . 2 Press Menu . You can also set the background for the Calendar Agenda View. See Customizing display options for your calendar for details. DID YOU KNOW? Typing… : Sets whether typing enters numbers in the Dial Pad or starts a contact search. If you select the Typing starts contacts search option, you can still enter numbers in the Dial Pad by pressing Option before entering the first number. TIP Show Calendar event: Sets whether the current event from the Calendar application appears in the Main View of the Phone application. When this option is enabled, you can then select this event to jump to the Calendar application. Show Favorite buttons: Sets whether Favorites appear in the Main View of the Phone application. Rows: Sets the number of favorite button rows that appear in the Main View of the Phone application. 5 Select OK. Setting your dialing preferences Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix to your phone numbers. For example, you can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit phone numbers. You can add a different prefix based on the length of the phone number. 1 Press Phone . 2 Press Menu . 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE 3 Select Options, and then select Dial Preferences. 4 Set any of the following options: Dialing from North America: Formats phone numbers using North American conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX). Always dial 1 in front of the area code: Adds a 1 in front of 10-digit phone numbers. This option is available only when North American Dialing is enabled. International Prefix: Replaces the + sign in front of International phone numbers with the specified number. To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to 7-digit numbers. For example, enter your own area code to automatically add your area code when you dial local numbers. 65 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a prefix to numbers with the specified number of digits. For example, if all the phone numbers in your office begin with 555, followed by a 4-digit extension, you can select 4, enter your area code, and then enter 555 as the prefix. When you want to call a colleague, simply enter the colleague’s 4-digit extension. Your smartphone automatically dials the area code and 555 plus the 4-digit extension. You can also create contact entries with just the extension number and then dial the number from your Contacts list. 5 Select OK. Choosing your privacy settings To maintain privacy, you can choose whether your longitude and latitude position are available to the network and third-party applications at all times or only during an emergency call. 1 Press Phone . 2 Press Menu . 3 From the Options menu, select Phone Preferences. 66 4 Select one of the following: Location ON: Enables the network to determine your longitude and latitude position at any time in order to provide location-specific services. Emergency Only: Restricts your location information to emergency services only. 5 Select OK. When Location ON is selected, the Location icon appears. When Emergency Only is selected, a red slash appears over the Location icon. Setting Roaming Preferences Use Roaming Preferences to set specific options for using your phone while roaming. For example, you can set options to be notified that you are roaming before placing a call or making a data connection, so that you are aware that you might incur extra charges. 1 Press Phone . 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Options, and then select Roaming Preferences. Home networks only: Lets your phone connect to your home network only. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE Roaming networks only: Lets your phone connect to roaming networks only. 5 Check the boxes to enable either or both of the following roaming warning options: Before outgoing calls: Displays an alert warning you that you are on a roaming network when you attempt to dial an outgoing call. 4 Select the Network Selection pick list and select the networks with which you want to allow your phone to make a connection: Allow roaming: Lets your phone determine the best network—either home or roaming—with which to connect. Before data connections: Displays an alert warning you that you are on a roaming network when you attempt to make a data connection, for example, to browse the Web. 6 Select OK. Enabling TTY TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a telecommunications device that enables you to communicate by telephone if you are deaf, hard of hearing, or have speech or language disabilities. 67 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE Your device is compatible with select TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD machine to your device through the headset jack while this mode is enabled. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device for connectivity information and to ensure that the TTY device supports digital wireless transmission. What are all those icons? 1 Press Phone . 2 Press Menu . Wireless Your phone is on and you are in Service your wireless service provider’s coverage area. If you are outside Name a coverage area, No Service or Roaming appears instead. No Service means that there is no coverage at all and Roaming means that another wireless service provider’s network is available. When you turn off your phone, Phone Off appears. 3 From the Options menu, select Phone Preferences. 4 Select the TTY/TDD pick list and select one of the following modes: Default Mode: Sends and receives text. VCO Mode: Sends voice and receives text. This is also known as Voice Carry Over Mode. HCO Mode: Sends text and receives voice. This is also known as Hearing Carry Over Mode Off: Sends and receives voice. 5 Select OK. A red TTY icon appears in the title bar of the Phone application whenever TTY is enabled. 68 You can monitor the status of several items using icons in the title bar of the Phone application: You are outside your wireless service provider’s coverage area and are roaming on another wireless service provider’s network. This icon appears in addition to the word Roaming. The icon may flash if the provider is not on your wireless service provider’s preferred roaming list. Your phone is on. The bars display the signal strength. The stronger the signal, the more bars that appear. If you are outside a coverage area, no bars appear. You are in an area that supports 1xRTT data services. You are in an area that supports EVDO data services. Your phone is on and connected to a 1XRTT network, but you are not actively transmitting data. You can still make and answer calls. Your phone is on and connected to an EVDO network, but you are not actively transmitting data. You can still make and answer calls. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE Your phone is on and a 1XRTT data connection is active. You can still make calls, but you cannot answer calls (incoming calls go to voicemail). When you make a call the data transmission is automatically interrupted. Your phone is on and an EVDO data connection is active. You can still make or answer calls. When you make or answer a call, the data transmission is automatically interrupted, and then it resumes when you end the call. You have new voicemail messages. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages. 69 CHAPTER 3 YOUR PHONE You have a new alert, such as a Calendar alarm or a new text message. To view the alert, press and hold Center or select the icon. See Viewing and using the alerts. TTY/TDD Mode is active. Use this mode to communicate by telephone if you are deaf or hard of hearing or if you have speech or language disabilities. The Location setting is on and your longitude and latitude position are available to the network and third-party applications. When you select the Emergency Only setting, this icon appears with a red slash and your location is available only during emergency calls. Call forwarding is active. 70 The Bluetooth® wireless technology icon appears in gray when this feature is off, in blue when this feature is on, and in reverse blue when your smartphone is communicating with another Bluetooth device. This icon replaces the Bluetooth icon when your smartphone is connected to a Bluetooth headset or car kit. This icon appears in dark blue when a call is in progress and in light blue when a call is not in progress. This icon replaces the Bluetooth icon when a dial-up networking connection using Bluetooth wireless technology is active. Your battery is partially drained. When the battery drains to 20% of its capacity, the icon changes from blue to red. At 10% of its capacity, you begin to receive warning messages, and at 5% of its capacity, the smartphone beeps (if the Ringer switch is in the Sound On position) and the icon changes from red to clear. Your battery is charging. The lightning bolt turns from red to green when the battery is fully charged and your smartphone remains connected to the charger. Displays the current (or next) event from the Calendar application. If you have an event conflict during the current time period, a red bar appears next to the event description. To jump to the current event in the Calendar application, select the Calendar status line (see Displaying your calendar for details). Your battery is fully charged and your smartphone is not connected to the charger. You have new text messages. The numbers next to the icon indicate the number of unread messages in your Inbox. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages. You have new email messages. The numbers next to the icon indicate the number of unread messages in your Inbox. If you set up multiple email accounts on your smartphone, this number reflects the account that was most recently accessed. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages. 3 CHAPTER YOUR PHONE KEY TERM 1xRTT (Single carrier [1x] radio transmission technology): A wireless technology that can provide fast data transfer and Internet access with average speeds of 60– 80Kbps and bursts up to 144Kbps. KEY TERM EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized): A wireless broadband technology that is designed for very high-speed data transfer with average download speeds of 400– 700Kbps, capable of reaching speeds up to1.8Mbps, and upload speeds up to 156Kbps. DID YOU KNOW? You can tap the Bluetooth icon to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless features on and off. To display the remaining battery power, tap the battery icon at the top of the screen. TIP 71 CHAPTER 3 72 YOUR PHONE CHAPT ER 4 Your email and other messages You already know how efficient email and messaging are for staying in touch. Now your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and colleagues anywhere you can access your wireless service provider’s data network. You can send photos to your friends and family, or create Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit at your convenience. Benefits • Access email on the go • Send and receive photos, sound files, Word and Excel files, and more • Save messages from your computer to view at a convenient time In this chapter Which application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 The VersaMail application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Which application should I use? Your smartphone includes the VersaMail® application (called Email in Applications View), which you can use to access your corporate, personal, and fee-based Internet email. You can also access web-based email, like Yahoo! Mail or Hotmail, from the web browser on your smartphone. NOTE Your wireless service provider may offer additional email applications that are compatible with your Treo 700P smartphone. Contact your wireless service provider’s customer service department for more info. An email application is not an email provider. It works with an account from a provider to transfer messages to your smartphone. TIP Email provider The service you use to send and receive email. Your email provider’s name appears between the @ symbol and the dot symbol in your email address. KEY TERM BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must activate data services on your wireless service provider account before you can use email on your smartphone. 4 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES The VersaMail application Before you can use VersaMail, you need to enter your email account settings. If you have multiple email accounts, you must enter settings for each email account. You can find additional information on using and customizing VersaMail in the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on your computer. Windows: Start>Programs>Palm Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and click the link to the User Guide for the VersaMail Application in the Documentation folder. 75 CHAPTER 4 YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES How do I get started? 1 If either of the following is true, read the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on your computer: • You used the VersaMail application on your previous Palm OS® device, and you want to transfer those settings to your smartphone. • You plan to use VersaMail to access an email account on a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync server, a Lotus Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI server. 2 If your email provider is listed here, then skip to Setting up VersaMail to work with common providers. Mail.com, NetZero, RCN, SBC/PacBell, SBC/Prodigy, Verizon DSL, and Yahoo! 3 If your email provider’s name is not listed, then you need to obtain the following info from your system administrator or ISP, and then skip to Setting up VersaMail to work with other providers: • Mail protocol: POP or IMAP • Incoming and outgoing mail server names, such as mail.myisp.com • Incoming and outgoing mail server port numbers, such as 110 (incoming POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25 (outgoing POP or IMAP) • (If necessary) Security settings: APOP, ESMTP, SSL Australia: Bigpond Mail and OptusNet Brazil: UOL The correct protocol, server, and security settings are required for VersaMail to be able to send and receive email for your account. Your email provider can easily provide these settings. You may be able to find this account setup info on your email provider’s website. TIP Canada: Rogers High Speed and Sympatico Mexico: Yahoo! United States: AOL, Apple.Mac, AT&T Global, AT&T Worldnet, Bell South, Cablevision, Charter, Comcast, CompuServe, Covad, EarthLink, 76 Setting up VersaMail to work with common providers 1 Press Applications and select Email to open the VersaMail application. 2 If the Initial Setup dialog box appears, select Continue. 3 Make up a name that describes this account and enter it in the Account Name field. For example, Work Email. 4 Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select your email provider, such as Earthlink, and then select Next. address. Check with your email provider if you are not sure what to enter as your username. 4 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES 6 Select the Password box, enter your email account password, select OK, and then select Next. 7 Select Next, and then select Done. To enter settings for another email account, open the Accounts menu and select Account Setup. TIP Setting up VersaMail to work with other providers 1 Press Applications and select Email to open the VersaMail application. 2 If the Initial Setup dialog box appears, select Continue. 5 Enter the username for your email account. Your username appears before the @ symbol in your email address. NOTE For some email providers, such as Gmail, your username is your entire email 3 Make up a name that describes this account and enter it in the Account Name field. For example, Work Email. 4 Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select Other. 5 Select the Protocol pick list, select POP or IMAP (based on the info you got from 77 CHAPTER 4 YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES your system administrator or ISP), and then select Next. settings, select Advanced, and then enter those settings. TIP You can also select Advanced to set more options for incoming and outgoing messages. 10 Select Done. Creating and sending messages 1 From the Inbox, select New. 6 Enter the username for your email account. Your username appears before the @ symbol in your email address. NOTE For some email providers, such as Gmail, your username is your entire email address. Check with your email provider if you are not sure what to enter as your username. 7 Select the Password box, enter your email account password, select OK, and then select Next. 8 Enter your email address and the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers, and then select Next. 9 If your system administrator or ISP provided port numbers or security 78 2 Begin entering one of the following for the addressee: • Email address • First name • Last name If you enter address info that matches one or more of your contacts, VersaMail displays the matching contacts. To accept a suggestion, select the correct contact. To send to a different address, keep entering the email address or name. TIP 3 Enter the subject and message text. To move between fields, press Up or Down on the 5-way. TIP 4 Select one of the following: Send: Connects and sends all messages immediately. If the message cannot be sent for any reason, the message is stored in your Outbox. . To remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments box, and then select Delete. TIP 4 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES Attaching photos and videos Outbox: Stores the message to be sent later. 1 Create the message to which you want to attach the photo or video. Drafts: Saves the message so you can continue working on it at another time. 2 On the New Message screen, select the red paper clip icon in the upper-right corner. 3 From the Type pick list, select Photo/ Video. DID YOU KNOW? VersaMail makes up to five attempts to send a message; if it is still not successful, an alert message appears and you must try to manually send the message again. Adding attachments to your messages You can attach several types of files to your email messages. 4 On the Select Media screen, select the Album pick list to go to the album containing the photo or video you want, and then check the box to the left of the photo or video. 5 Select Done. 79 CHAPTER 4 YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES . To attach more than one file to a message, repeat steps 3 and 4. TIP Attaching ringtones 1 Create the message to which you want to attach the ringtone. 2 On the New Message screen, select the red paper clip icon in the upper-right corner. 3 From the Type pick list, select Sounds. TIP Ringtones that are copy-protected appear in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You can use these ringtones on your phone, but you cannot send them as attachments. 4 Select the ringtone you want, and then select Insert. 3 From the Type pick list, select Documents. 4 Select the file you want on the Documents screen. 5 Select Done. Attaching other types of files 1 Create the message to which you want to attach the item. 2 On the New Message screen, select the red paper clip icon in the upper-right corner. 3 From the Type pick list, select the type of file to attach—for example, Address, Appointment, or Memo/Text. 4 Select the item you want from the list in the Type box. 5 Select Done. 5 Select Done. Receiving and viewing messages Attaching Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and PDF files 1 From any mailbox, select Get or Get & Send. 1 Create the message to which you want to attach the file. 2 From the Inbox, select the message you want to view. 2 On the New Message screen, select the red paper clip icon in the upper-right corner. 80 Replying to or forwarding messages 4 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES When you respond to messages, you can select whether to include the original text (see Customizing your email settings). The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only, with all HTML tags stripped, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally received as HTML. DID YOU KNOW? 1 From the Inbox or another folder, open the message you want to respond to. 2 In Message View, select Reply. Select whether to reply to just the sender or to reply to both the sender and all addressees on the message. 3 Enter your reply. 3 If a large incoming message is truncated, select More . 4 Select Send. You can also tap the folder icon to the left of the attachment name to open a menu of tasks you can do with the attachment, including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on the attachment file type; Save to card to save the attachment to an expansion card; or select Viewer to select the application you want to use to view the attachment. TIP When viewing a message, tap the scroll arrows at the top of the screen to view the previous or next message. TIP 4 Select Done. 81 CHAPTER 4 YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES Viewing attachments You can also tap the folder icon to the left of the attachment name to open a menu of tasks you can do with the attachment, including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on the attachment file type; Save to card to save the attachment to an expansion card; or select Viewer to select the application you want to use to view the attachment. TIP There are a number of attachment types you can open with the built-in software on your smartphone (for example, Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files; PDF files; ringtones, and photos). 1 From any folder, open the message with the attachment you want to view. Messages with downloaded attachments appear with a paper clip icon to the left of the message icon. If an attachment is not downloaded because it is larger than your maximum message size, the paper clip icon does not appear, and the attachment does not display at the bottom of the message screen. Select More to download and display any attachments. TIP 2 Tap the attachment name at the bottom of the message screen to view it in the default viewer on your smartphone. 3 When you finish with the attachment, select Done to return to the Attachments dialog box. NOTE If there is no Done button, press Applications and select Email return to the account’s Inbox. Managing your messages The status icons that appear near the messages in your Inbox indicate the following: 0 The message is unread when the subject appears in bold. The message includes an attachment. The message includes a meeting invitation. 82 to This message has high priority. You can rearrange the message list to make it easier to find and view messages. • • In the Inbox, select Sort, and then select one of the following: Sort by Date, Sort by Name, Sort by Subject. To quickly switch between folders in list view, select the folder pick list at the top of the screen and select the desired folder. Deleting selected messages from the Inbox When you delete a message from the Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder. 1 Select the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want to delete. To select adjacent messages, drag the stylus so it touches the bullet to the left of each message. Lift the stylus and drag again to select more adjacent messages. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Delete on the Message menu. 4 If a confirmation dialog box appears, select OK to confirm deletion. 4 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES To delete a single message, select the envelope icon next to the message, and then select Delete from the list. TIP Deleting messages by date You can quickly delete a group of messages by selecting a range of dates. 1 Press Menu . 2 Select Delete Old on the Message menu. 3 Select the folder and a date range for the messages you want to delete. 4 Select OK. 5 If a confirmation dialog box appears, select OK to confirm deletion. To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open the Message menu and select Empty Trash. TIP Switching accounts If you create more than one email account in VersaMail, you need to switch from account to account to get, send, and 83 CHAPTER 4 YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES otherwise manage the messages in each account. 1 Press Menu . 2 Select Accounts, and then select an account. If you assigned VersaMail to a quick button, you can press that button repeatedly to switch between your different email accounts. DID YOU KNOW? Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and click the link to the User Guide for the VersaMail Application in the Documentation folder. Scheduling Auto Sync You can set up VersaMail to automatically download new email messages to your smartphone with the Auto Sync feature. You need to set up a separate Auto Sync schedule for each email account. This feature may not work with email accounts that require VPN connection. TIP Customizing your email settings You can customize the VersaMail settings for each individual email account on your Treo. The preferences you set apply only to the email account you are currently viewing. If you have multiple accounts, configure each account separately. You can set up a schedule to automatically retrieve email messages; set preferences for how and when messages are retrieved; add a signature to an outgoing message; and more. For complete information on all of the email settings you can customize, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on your computer. Windows: Start>Programs>Palm 84 1 Press Menu . 2 Select Options, and then select Preferences. 3 Select Auto Sync. 4 Check the Auto-sync box. 5 Select the Every pick list and select the time interval, from 5 minutes to 12 hours. 1 From any mailbox screen, press Menu . NOTE If you set a more frequent interval, 2 Select Options, and then select Preferences. you may need to recharge your Treo battery more often. 4 Check the Alert me of new mail box. 6 Select the Start Time and End Time boxes, and then select the hour, the minute, and AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last Auto Sync to take place. Select OK. 7 Select the days you want the schedule to be active. You can choose any number of days, but you can set up only one schedule for each email account. 8 Select OK, and then select Get Mail. After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync and select Get Mail, from then on, only new messages are retrieved during Auto Sync. 4 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES 3 Select Alerts. To receive notifications of successful Auto Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of auto sync failures box. Leave the box checked if you want to receive notifications of both successful and failed Auto Sync retrievals. TIP 5 Select the Alert Sound pick list, and then select a sound. Your Treo plays a brief demo of the sound. 6 Select OK. TIP Selecting alert tones When you schedule Auto Sync for a given account, you can choose a sound—such as a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you know when new email arrives. Setting preferences for getting messages 1 From any mailbox screen, press Menu . 2 Select Options, and then select Preferences. 3 Select Incoming. 85 YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES CHAPTER 4 The POP protocol does not support retrieval of only unread mail from the server. If you have a POP email account, VersaMail downloads all messages regardless of whether you have read them, and regardless of whether the Unread messages box is checked. TIP 4 Set any of the following preferences, and then select OK. Get: Indicates whether to get message subjects only or entire messages. Ask Every Time: Indicates if you want to see a dialog box for selecting subjects only or entire messages each time you retrieve email. If the box is unchecked, messages are retrieved according to the option you select in the Get pick list. Unread messages (IMAP accounts only): Downloads only unread mail to your smartphone. If you don’t check this box and you select Get & Send, all the messages on your mail server are downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you’ve read. 86 Mail from last: Gets messages sent within the number of days you specify. Download attachments: Automatically downloads files attached to email, except for attachments that exceed the maximum message size. Maximum message size: Sets the maximum size of an incoming email message. Enter the size in kilobytes (KB). The default is 5KB, but you can enter any size up to 2048KB [approximately 2 megabytes (MB)], including attachments. The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments. Message Format: Sets the format for messages you retrieve. HTML: Displays messages sent in HTML format with basic formatting intact and displays other messages as plain text. Text: Displays all messages as plain text, regardless of the format in which they were sent. Attaching a signature to a message You can attach a personal signature, with info like your company’s address and phone numbers, to the bottom of all messages you send. 1 From any mailbox screen, press Menu . 2 Select Options, and then select Preferences. 3 Select Signature. 4 Check the Attach Signature box. 5 Enter your signature information, and then select OK. on your smartphone to directly access corporate groupware information in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003. You can synchronize business email, calendar, and contact info with Exchange Server 2003 from your smartphone without using a desktop computer. 4 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES When you create a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in the VersaMail application, your email, calendar, and contact info sync directly with Exchange Server; information does not sync with the desktop software application on your computer, such as Microsoft Outlook or Palm Desktop software. Other information that is stored on your computer, such as tasks and memos, continues to synchronize with your desktop software. For complete info on using a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on your computer. Windows: Start > Programs > Palm Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with the VersaMail, Calendar, and Contacts apps Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and click the link to the User Guide for the VersaMail Application in the Documentation folder. 87 CHAPTER 4 YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES Messaging 2 Select New. 3 Select the To field to address the message: BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your phone is turned on (see Turning your phone on and off). You can use the Messaging application to exchange brief text messages (SMS) with other devices and email addresses that support this form of messaging. Before you use your smartphone to send or receive messages, refer to your service plan for pricing and availability of messaging services. DID YOU KNOW? You can address messages to multiple recipients by separating the addresses with a comma. If you address a single message to three people, you will be billed for three messages. Creating and sending a text message Each text message can hold up to 160 characters. (If you send a text message to an email address, the email address is deducted from the 160-character count.) 1 Press Messaging 88 . • Press Center . If the recipient’s name appears in the list of recent addresses, select it from the list. • If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and last name (no spaces), and then select the recipient’s phone number or email address, depending on where you want to send the message. • If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list of recent addresses or your Contacts list, enter the phone number, or email address. If you see numbers when you expect to see letters (or the other way around), you need to turn Option Lock on by pressing Option twice or turn it off by pressing Option once. TIP 4 Enter your message or select QuickText to insert predefined phrases. To insert emoticons, select . Receiving messages To add a new QuickText phrase, select Edit QuickText from the list. TIP NOTE Some symbols can’t be used in text messages. The Messaging application automatically replaces invalid characters. 5 (Optional) Press Menu , and then select High Priority from the Compose menu to mark the message as urgent. 6 Select Send. TIP Select Save as Draft to save a draft of the message without sending it. To access the draft, select the folder list in the title bar and select Drafts. 4 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES When your phone is turned on and in an area of wireless coverage, you automatically receive new text messages. You can also configure how your smartphone notifies you when a new message arrives (see Selecting Messaging alert tones). The new message alert may include any of the following buttons: OK: Dismisses the alert and places the message in your Inbox. Reply: Opens Chat View, where you can reply with a text message. Call Back: Dials the sender’s phone number. 89 CHAPTER 4 YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES Go To Msg: Opens the message so you can view its full contents. Your smartphone automatically launches the appropriate application from the link. Delete: Moves the message from your Inbox to the Deleted folder. Arranging your messages When you receive a message, you can also press Send to call the sender. TIP You can rearrange the messages in any folder by using the Sort command. 1 Press Messaging . If you have multiple alerts, the Alert screen displays all your pending alerts. Select an item’s description to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that item. To view all your pending alerts from any screen on your smartphone, press and hold Center on the 5-way. TIP Using links in messages When you receive a text message that contains a telephone number, email address, or URL, you can dial the number, send an email message, or go to the web page immediately. 1 Press Messaging . 2 Select the message that contains the link you want to use. 3 Select the phone number, email address, or URL (appears as underlined blue text). 90 2 Select the folder list in the title bar and select the folder you want to sort. 3 Press Menu . 4 Select View, and then select Sort by Name or Sort by Date. Deleting messages You can delete several messages at once from any folder by using the Purge command. 1 Press Messaging . 2 Select the folder list in the title bar and select the folder that contains the messages you want to delete. 3 Press Menu . 4 Select Purge from the Message menu. 5 Select the Purge pick list, and then select an option. 6 Select OK. You can carry on multiple chats at the same time and easily switch between them, using the pick list at the top of the screen. 1 Press Messaging 4 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES . 2 Do one of the following: Start a new chat: Select a message and reply to it. Continue an existing chat: Select a message with the chat icon. Chatting with Messaging DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text messages even while you are on a phone call. This is easiest when using a hands-free headset or the speakerphone. When you exchange more than one message with a single contact, the messages you exchange with that person are grouped into a chat session. When you select a chat session from your message list, the upper part of Chat View displays all messages you’ve exchanged with this contact, and the lower part provides an entry area. 3 Enter your message. Pale gray text indicates that a message is pending or enroute. TIP 4 Select Send. 91 CHAPTER 4 YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES Customizing your Messaging settings 1 Press Messaging 2 Press Menu . 5 Select the Chat tab and set any of the following preferences for chat sessions. . 3 From the Options menu, select Preferences. 4 On the Messages tab, set any of the following preferences for your individual messages: Create chats from messages: Indicate when you want to group messages from the same person into a chat. Show timestamps in chats: Indicate whether you want to see the local date and time the message was sent next to each message. Confirm message deletions: Indicate whether you want deletion confirmation prompts to appear. Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicate whether you want the body text to appear in the alert when you receive a new message, or if you want the alert to hide the text and prompt you to go to the message. 92 Display my name in chat window as: Enter the name you want to use as the label for your messages in Chat View. Label color: Select a color to differentiate your messages from the sender’s messages while in Chat View. Use color for: Indicate whether you want both your name and message text in the selected label color, or only your name. 6 Select OK. Selecting Messaging alert tones DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a silent alert that can vibrate even when the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. 1 Press Messaging 2 Press Menu . 6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select how you want your smartphone to vibrate upon an incoming message. 4 CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES 7 Select the Message Tone pick list and select a tone for incoming message alerts. 8 Check the boxes if you want to see onscreen alerts when a new message arrives and when a message you sent is received. 9 Select Done. . 3 Select Options, and then select Alerts. What are all those icons? By default, the Messaging app shows the Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select the folder list in the title bar and select a different folder from the list. TIP The message descriptions in the Inbox, Outbox, and Sent folders show the message status: 4 Select the Application pick list and select Messaging. 5 Select the Volume pick list and select the volume level. • Unread messages appear in bold. • Read messages appear in plain text. • Urgent messages appear with a red exclamation point (!). 93 CHAPTER 4 YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES The following icons show the message type and additional status info: A text message A message that was sent to multiple recipients, and only some of the recipients received the message An outgoing message with an error A chat session A voicemail page If you are outside a coverage area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing messages go into the Outbox. When you return to a coverage area or turn your phone back on, your pending messages are sent automatically and transferred to the Sent folder. DID YOU KNOW? An incoming message with an error A message that is waiting to be sent A message that was successfully sent 94 CHAPT ER 5 Your connections to the web and wireless devices You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping, news, web-based email. Now, with your wireless service provider’s network and the built-in web browser, you can take the web with you almost anywhere. The built-in Bluetooth® feature of your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to share contacts or your favorite photos with other people. Benefits • Carry the web with you • Store web pages for offline viewing • Connect to Bluetooth devices In this chapter Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Connections with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Web browser The Blazer® web browser on your smartphone provides quick and easy access to web pages. You can view most sites you use on your computer, including those with security and advanced features, such as JavaScript and frames. To browse the web, you must activate data services from your wireless service provider. pages into a single column and resizes images on your screen. This way, you can see most content without scrolling left or right. 5 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES You can send email from a web page on your smartphone. Email addresses appear as links on web pages. After you configure an email application on your smartphone, you can select an email address link to create a message to the selected address. DID YOU KNOW? You can visit secure websites. The security certificates and 128-bit Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption let you browse secure sites, such as online shopping, banking, and email. Remember: Some secure sites also require specific browsers and may not work with the web browser application. DID YOU KNOW? DID YOU KNOW? The web browser supports JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and cookies, but does not support plug-ins (such as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets. Viewing a web page The web browser uses patent-pending technology to optimize web pages for your smartphone. By default, the browser is in Optimized Mode, which reformats web 1 Make sure your phone is turned on (see Turning your phone on and off). 2 Press Phone and confirm that data services are available. You should see either the 1XRTT or EVDO icon in the title bar. 97 CHAPTER 5 YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES If you do not see a 1XRTT or EVDO icon, data services are not available in your current location and you cannot connect to the Internet. 3 Press Applications Web . and select 4 Enter a web page address (URL) in the Address Bar and select Go. NOTE If you browse to a secure web page, a lock Address Bar. icon appears in the 5 Do any of the following to navigate within the web page: View a page in wide layout format (as on your computer): Press Menu , select Options, and then select Wide Page Mode. pressing Left or Right and then press Center to go to the selected page. In Wide Page mode, use the stylus to select a link. Submit a form: Enter the info and then select the onscreen button to submit the form. If the form doesn’t have an onscreen button, press Return . To adjust the font size, open the Options menu and select Font. To fit more text on the screen, select Small. To make the text easier to read, select Large. TIP 6 Use the 5-way to access any of the following icons in the title bar: Goes to the previous web page. Goes to the next web page. Scroll through the page: In Optimized Mode (the default format which is optimized for your smartphone screen), press Up or Down . In Wide Page Mode, press Up , Down , Left , or Right to scroll in all directions. Follow a link to another web page: In Optimized Mode, highlight the link by 98 Refreshes the page with the latest content from the Internet. Opens a list where you can select Fast Mode (no images or style sheets) or Normal Mode (with images and style sheets). Opens a dialog box where you can enter a web address you want to go to or view a list of recently viewed web pages. Goes to your home page. To find a recent page or search, select the Address Bar pick list and select the item from the list. TIP Want to get to the icons faster? Press Space to jump to the Address Bar and then press Up on the 5-way to scroll to the icons. You can also press Menu to access the same commands from the menus. TIP You can customize the Fast Mode settings. See Customizing your web browser settings for details. quickly. Note that a bookmark is different from a favorite (see Defining favorite buttons). 5 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES The predefined bookmarks take you to pages that are optimized for your smartphone. DID YOU KNOW? 1 Go to the page you want to bookmark. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Add Bookmark from the Page menu. 4 (Optional) Change the entries in the Name and Description fields. 5 Select OK, and then select OK again. TIP Tap and hold the Back or Forward buttons or select these buttons with the 5-way to pop up a list of sites you’ve visited. TIP Creating a bookmark With bookmarks you can instantly access a web page without entering the address every time. The web browser can store up to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing you to open your favorite web pages 99 CHAPTER 5 YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES Saving a page You can use the web browser to save a page for offline viewing, so you don’t need a wireless connection to view it later. 1 Go to the page you want to save. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Save Page from the Page menu. 4 Select OK, and then select OK again. Viewing bookmarks or saved pages Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in Bookmarks View. Saved pages are indicated by a small triangle in the upper-right corner of the bookmark. You can make Bookmarks View the default view when you open the browser. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Select the Start With pick list and select Bookmarks. DID YOU KNOW? 1 Select the Bookmarks View icon. 2 Select the bookmark or saved page you want to view. 100 To go back to the last web page you viewed without selecting a bookmark, select Page View. TIP Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved page 1 From Bookmarks View, press Menu . 2 Select Edit Bookmarks on the Bookmarks menu. 3 Select the bookmark you want to edit or delete. 5 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES Your wireless service provider may preset bookmarks on your smartphone that are customized for their services. You may not be able to customize some of the preset bookmarks. If you can’t edit, delete, or beam a bookmark, it is probably locked and these actions are prohibited. TIP 4 Enter the desired changes. 5 Select OK. Arranging bookmarks and saved pages Bookmarks View includes ten pages for bookmarks so that you can arrange bookmarks and saved pages in a logical fashion. For example, you can store travel links on one bookmark page, stock links on another, and business links on a third page. 2 Select Edit Bookmarks from the Bookmarks menu. 3 Enter a title for this page of bookmarks. 4 Use the stylus to drag and drop a bookmark into the desired slot. You can move a bookmark within the current page or move it to a different bookmark page by dragging and dropping it on the Bookmark Page icon. 5 Select OK. 1 From Bookmarks View, press Menu . 101 CHAPTER 5 YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES Downloading files from a web page The web browser lets you download files that are recognized by one of the applications on your smartphone. When you download a file, you can open it in the application that recognizes the file. For example, download an MP3 file so you can listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™ application. If a file is not recognized by any of the applications on your smartphone, you can download the file to an expansion card, but you cannot open it on your smartphone. You can download files such as new applications, and choose to play or save music and video files in many popular formats—provided that the website permits the downloading of files: 102 Item Supported File Types Pictures JPEG, WBMP, GIF, animated GIF Videos MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV Ringtones MIDI, AAC Music MP3, WMA You can also access software and other downloads using the Downloads bookmark. TIP 1 Go to the page with the link to the file you want to download. 2 Press Left or Right to highlight the link to the file, and then press Center . 3 If prompted, select what you want to do with the file: Play, Save To Device, or Save To Card. 4 Select Yes. You can also save an image from a web page by tapping and holding it with the stylus. TIP Streaming files from a web page The web browser lets you stream files that are recognized by one of the applications on your smartphone. For example, you can choose to play music and video files in many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV). 1 When the web browser recognizes streamed content on a web page, it displays a Play icon. To view or listen to the streamed content, select Play . Copying text from a web page The web browser recognizes streamed content that is not supported by any of the applications on your smartphone, and it displays a Media type not supported message. TIP 2 Once streaming begins, playback starts automatically. Use the following controls when viewing or listening: • Select return to the web page containing the streamed content. • Select or press Center pause playback. to • Select or press Center to resume playback after pausing. • A few seconds after playback begins, the toolbar is hidden and you can view the content on the full screen. Press Up or Down to display the toolbar; press Up or Down again to hide the toolbar again. • Press the Volume button on the side of your smartphone to adjust the volume. 5 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES You can copy text from a web page and paste it into other applications. 1 Use the stylus to highlight the text you want to copy. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Edit, and then select Copy. 4 Go to the app in which you want to paste the text and use the stylus or 5-way to position the cursor where you want to paste the text. 5 Press Menu . 6 Select Edit, and then select Paste. If the web browser does not recognize a phone number as dialable, you can copy the phone number (as text) and paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a web page or message). DID YOU KNOW? Returning to recently viewed pages The History list stores the addresses of the last 100 pages you visited. Items in the History list are sorted chronologically. 1 From Page View, press Menu . 2 Select History from the Page menu. 103 CHAPTER 5 YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 3 Press Down list. to navigate through the 4 Select the web page you want to load. Finding text on a web page 1 From Page View, press Menu . 2 Select Find Text on Page from the Page menu. 3 Enter the text you want to find. 4 Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box to indicate whether you want the search to wrap from the end of the page to the beginning when the end is reached. 5 Select Find to start the search. Customizing your web browser settings 1 From Page View, press Menu . 2 Select Options, and then select Preferences. 3 Select Page and set any of the following preferences: Start With: Determines which view appears when you open the browser. 104 Home Page: Sets the page that appears when you select . Restore Default: Selects the original home page, if you changed it. Show Address Bar: Sets whether the web address appears in Page View. When it is visible, you can select the pick list to go to a previously viewed page or enter a URL directly from Page View. 4 Select General and set any of the following preferences: Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines whether you want to hide selected items so that web pages load faster. When you select Fast mode, you can set the following options: 5 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES Disable cascading style sheets: Determines whether style sheets are applied when you load a web page. When style sheets are disabled, pages download faster, but you may lose some of the formatting. Auto-complete: Determines whether the web browser suggests text, based on your previous entries, when you begin entering info. Disable cookies: Determines whether websites can store personalized info on your Treo smartphone. Some sites do not work properly if you select this option. Disable JavaScript: Bypasses JavaScript elements on the web pages you view. Tap and Drag: Determines whether dragging the stylus selects text or scrolls through the content of the page. KEY TERM Cascading style sheets A method used to describe the presentation of a web page or document written in a markup language, such as HTML or XML. Don’t download images! Determines whether images appear when you load a web page. If you select not to view images, then web pages load faster. You can still see any image by tapping and holding the placeholder box on the web page. 5 Select Advanced and set any of the following preferences: Set memory limit for storing pages: Sets the memory available for your 105 CHAPTER 5 YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES cache. Pages are cached so that they load faster the next time you view them. 6 Select OK. Connections with Bluetooth devices Cookies: Indicates how much memory is being used by cookies. To free up this memory, select Clear Cookies. Cache: Indicates how much memory is being used by your cache to store recent pages and history. To free up this memory, select Clear Cache. Clear cache on exit: Determines whether the cache clears each time you exit the web browser. Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to access the Internet. If your connection requires a proxy server, please contact your Internet service provider or IT administrator for this information. 106 With your smartphone’s built-in Bluetooth wireless technology, you can connect to a number of Bluetooth devices, such as a headset, car kit, printer, or GPS receiver, as well as to other smartphones and handhelds that are equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can also synchronize wirelessly or use your phone as a wireless modem. You can create a list of Bluetooth devices that you trust to communicate with your Treo smartphone. When communicating with trusted devices, your Treo smartphone skips the discovery process and creates a secure link as long as the device is within range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10 meters) depending on environmental conditions, including obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors. When you configure a headset as described in Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device, the headset is automatically added to your trusted device list. Follow the steps in this section to add other devices to your trusted device list, such as a friend’s handheld. NOTE Use the same device name for all your Bluetooth connections. If you change the device name, you need to recreate any partnerships you already created. 5 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 4 Select Setup Devices. 5 Select Trusted Devices. Requesting a connection with another Bluetooth device 1 Press Applications Bluetooth . and select 2 Select Bluetooth On. 6 Select Add Device. The Discovery icon appears, indicating that the discovery process is active. 7 Select the Show pick list and select Nearby devices. 3 (Optional) Enter a device name that identifies your smartphone when it is discovered by other Bluetooth devices. 8 If the device you want to add doesn’t appear on the discovery results list, make sure that the other device is ready to receive a connection request (see the device’s documentation), and then select Find More on your smartphone to search again. 107 CHAPTER 5 YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 9 Enter the same passkey on your smartphone and on the Bluetooth device, and select OK. 1 Press Applications Bluetooth . and select 2 Select Bluetooth On. IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices have a preset passkey; if so, you can find the passkey in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and the other Bluetooth device. We recommend that where possible, you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. 10 Select Done. Accepting a connection from another Bluetooth device For the smartphone to be visible to Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth setting must be set to On and visibility must be set to Visible or Temporary. TIP 108 3 (Optional) Enter a device name that identifies your smartphone when it is discovered by other Bluetooth devices. NOTE Use the same device name for all your Bluetooth connections. If you change the device name, you need to recreate any partnerships you already created. 4 Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following: Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to request a connection with your smartphone. Your smartphone remains accessible to other devices until you turn this option off. After you’re done using this setting, remember to change it back to Hidden. 5 Enter the same passkey on your smartphone and on the Bluetooth device. 5 CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices, Use the Visible option only when you need your smartphone to be accessible for an extended period of time. For short term accessibility, use the Temporary option. TIP Hidden: Allows only devices with which such as headsets and GPS receivers, have a preset passkey; if so, you can find the passkey in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and the other Bluetooth device. We recommend that where possible, you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. you have previously formed a partnership to request a connection with your smartphone. New devices cannot request a connection. 6 (Optional) Check the Add to trusted device list box if you want to form a partnership with the requesting device. Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to request a connection with your smartphone during the next two minutes. Your smartphone reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to other devices after two minutes. 7 Select OK. 109 CHAPTER 5 110 YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES CHAPT ER 6 Your photos, videos, and music Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets, and your most recent vacation? Are you tired of carrying both your MP3 player and your phone? Your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone solves both problems. You can keep your favorite photos right on your smartphone—videos, too. And there's no need to carry an expensive MP3 player; you can play music on your smartphone. Simply transfer songs onto your smartphone or an expansion card and then listen through your stereo headphones (cards and headphones sold separately). Benefits • Never be far from your favorite people, places, and songs • Arrange your photos, videos, and songs • No separate photo viewer, MP3, CD, or mini-disc player required In this chapter Camera and Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Pics & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Pocket Tunes™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Camera and Camcorder location is based on the location of the album (smartphone or expansion card). Your smartphone comes with an easy-to-use, built-in, 1.3-megapixel camera with 2x digital zoom. You can use the camera to take and view pictures and videos and send them to your friends and family. To add a personal touch to your smartphone, use your pictures as your wallpaper in the Main View of the Phone application, and as caller ID images. Taking a picture You can store pictures on your smartphone or on an expansion card. 1 Press Applications Camera . and select 2 By default, the Camera application stores pictures you take in the PALM folder on your smartphone. To store a picture in a different location, select one of the following:: Stores the picture in the selected album. The storage 6 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC New Albums: Opens a dialog box where you can enter an album name and select the storage location (smartphone or expansion card). The camera defaults to 1.3 megapixel (1280 x 1024) resolution. The camera also supports VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA (320 x 240) resolution. To view these settings before you take a picture, press Menu. TIP 3 Find your subject in the screen on your smartphone. (The lens is on the back of your smartphone.) 4 (Optional) To get a close-up of your subject, press Up to select 2x. Press Down to return to 1x. 113 CHAPTER 6 YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 5 Press Center picture. to capture the 6 Do any of the following: To add an audio caption later, open the picture and then select Audio Caption from the Photo menu. TIP You can personalize a picture. Open the Photo menu, select Draw on, and then use the drawing tools to add your own personal touch. When you save the picture, you can replace the original or save a copy. DID YOU KNOW? Recording a video You can store videos on your smartphone or on an expansion card. Saves the picture in the location you selected in step 2. Deletes the picture. Opens a dialog box where you can choose to attach the picture to an email message or send it to another Bluetooth device. 1 Press Applications Camcorder . and select The video recording screen displays the approximate recording time you have left based on the space available on your smartphone or expansion card. Actual recording time may vary depending on how fast you are moving, how many colors you are recording, and so on. TIP Lets you add a voice caption. 2 By default, the Camcorder application stores videos you record in the PALM folder on your smartphone. To store a video in a different location, select one of the following: 114 : Stores the video in the selected album. The storage location is based on the location of the album (smartphone or expansion card). New Albums: Opens a dialog box where you can enter an album name and select the storage location (smartphone or expansion card). 5 After you finish recording, press Center again to stop. 6 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 6 Select any of the following: Plays the video, so you can review it. Saves the video in the location you selected in step 2. Deletes the video. The camcorder defaults to CIF (352 x 288) resolution and also supports QCIF (176 x 144) resolution. To view these settings before you capture a video, press Menu. TIP 3 Find your subject in the screen on your smartphone. (The lens is on the back of your smartphone.) 4 Press Center to start recording. Opens a dialog box where you can choose to attach the video to an email message or send it to another Bluetooth device. Opens a dialog box where you can adjust the volume during playback. 115 CHAPTER 6 YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the During playback, tap and drag the progress indicator bar to jump to a different section of the video. Select Pause to pause video playback. TIP microphone on and off so that you can record videos with or without sound. Resolution: Sets the default size for newly captured pictures or videos. Customizing your Camera settings You can customize the built-in camera’s settings for your Treo 700P smartphone. 1 Go to Camera View or Camcorder View. 2 Press Menu . If you are in Camera View, the Photo Settings screen appears. If you are in Camcorder View, the Video Settings screen appears. 3 Set any of the following preferences: Effects: Sets the color palette for the current picture or video. You cannot change an item’s palette after you take the picture or video. Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the sound that plays before you take the picture. Shutter sound: Determines whether a sound plays when you take a picture or video. 116 Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines whether the date the picture is taken appears on your pictures. Review photos/videos: Determines whether you can review pictures or videos before saving them and how quickly they are automatically saved. Auto naming: Assigns a name to a series of pictures or videos to be captured, such as Seattle001, Seattle002, and so on. 1 Press Applications Pics&Videos . 6 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC and select 2 Select the album that contains the picture you want to see. To view an album from an expansion card, insert the card and select the album from the Album list. If the items on the card are not grouped into albums, select the card name from the list. TIP 4 Select Done. 3 Select the picture you want to view. Pics & Videos Viewing a picture In addition to viewing the pictures you capture with the built-in camera, you can view pictures captured on many popular digital cameras or downloaded from the Internet. Your smartphone supports the following picture formats: • JPG • TIF • BMP • GIF 4 Press Right or Left to scroll to the next item in the album. To see the outer edges of a picture that may not be visible, use the stylus to tap and drag the picture in any direction. DID YOU KNOW? 5 If the picture has a voice caption, select to hear it. 6 Tap the picture or press Center return to Thumbnail View. to In Thumbnail View, you can group photos or videos to more easily locate them. Select one of the grouping options from the View menu. TIP 117 CHAPTER 6 YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC Viewing a video In addition to viewing the videos you capture with the built-in camera, you can view videos captured on many popular digital cameras. Your smartphone supports the following types of video files: If you pause video playback and then close the video, the video starts where you left off the next time you play it. DID YOU KNOW? • 3GP Viewing a slide show • 3G2 (MPEG-4 video + QCELP audio + .3g2 file type) 1 Press Applications Pics&Videos . • MP4 • MPG 2 Highlight (or open) the album you want to view. • M4V • ASF (with MPEG-4 video and IMA-ADPCM audio) • AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio) 1 Press Applications Pics&Videos . and select 2 Select the album that contains the video you want to see. 3 Select the video you want to view. Playback begins automatically. 4 Hold down Right or Left to seek within the current video, or press Right or Left to scroll to the next item in the album. 118 5 Press Center to return to Thumbnail View. and select 3 (Optional) Press Menu , select Options, and then select Auto-hide Toolbar Off if you want to see the toolbar. 4 Press Space show. 5 Press Center previous view. to start the slide to return to the 4 Select Share. To set slide show options such as background music and transitions, open the Options menu and select Slideshow Setting. Keep in mind that background music overrides audio captions when you’re running a slide show. Background music for a slide show also overrides any music that might be playing using the Pocket Tunes application on your smartphone if you start a slide show. TIP Sending pictures or videos You can attach pictures or videos to email messages or send them to another Bluetooth device. 5 Select the method you want to use to send the pictures or videos. 6 (Optional) Enter any text you want to add to the message. 1 From the Album list, select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to send. 7 Address and send the message. 2 Tap in the lower-right corner of the screen. You can copy pictures or videos into another album. You can also copy pictures and videos between your smartphone and an expansion card. 3 Select the pictures or videos to send, or select Select All to send the entire album. (A + sign appears next to selected items.) DID YOU KNOW? You cannot send copyrighted pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon in Thumbnail View or Picture list. 6 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC Copying a picture or video 1 From the Album list, select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to copy. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Copy to from the Photo (or Video) menu. 119 CHAPTER 6 YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 4 Select the pictures or videos to copy, or select Select All to copy the entire album. (A + sign appears next to selected items.) 5 Select Copy. 6 Select the Copy items to pick list and select whether you want to copy the selected items to your device or to an expansion card. + sign indicates a picture is selected Organizing pictures and videos 1 Open the album you want to organize. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Album, and then select Add to album or Remove from album. 4 Select the pictures or videos to add or remove, or select Select All to add or remove the entire album. (A + sign indicates that you want to add the item. An X sign indicates that you want to remove the item.) 5 Select Add or Remove. You can also open the Album list from Camera View or Camcorder View by selecting the icon in the lower-right corner. DID YOU KNOW? Install the Palm® Files application from the Palm Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card. TIP 7 Select the Into album pick list and select the album you want to copy the selected items to. To change the name, add a caption, or view other picture or video information, highlight (or open) the item, open the Photo (or Video) menu, and select Details. TIP 8 Select Copy. You can also move pictures and videos between albums. Open the Photo (or Video) menu and select Move to. The remaining steps are the same as copying pictures, but use the Move commands instead of the Copy commands. TIP 120 Saving a picture as wallpaper Deleting a picture or video You can select a picture to use as wallpaper for the Main View in the Phone application. 1 Open the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete. 1 Open the picture you want to save as wallpaper. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Options, and then select Save as Wallpaper. 4 When the confirmation message appears, confirm by selecting Yes, or decline by selecting No. 2 Press Menu 6 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC . 3 Select Delete from the Photo (or Video) menu. 4 Select the pictures or videos that you want to delete, or select Select All to delete the entire album. (An X sign appears next to selected items.) 5 Select Delete. 6 Select Delete to confirm the deletion. Adding a picture to a contact entry 1 Open the picture you want to add to a contact. 2 Press Menu You can also highlight a picture or video in Thumbnail View, and then press Backspace to delete the highlighted item. TIP . 3 Select Options, and then select Save as Contact. Viewing pictures and videos on your computer 4 Select the contact you want to add this picture to. When you synchronize your Treo 700P smartphone, your pictures and videos are copied to your desktop computer. You can view pictures in JPEG format and videos in MPEG-4 format (3G2 file extension). You can email them to friends using your desktop email application. Rotating a picture 1 Open the picture you want to rotate. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Rotate from the Photo menu. 4 Select the orientation. 121 CHAPTER 6 YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC You can view and edit synchronized pictures and videos in the Palm Media desktop application. Open Palm® Desktop software and click the Media icon. You can refer to the Palm Desktop Online Help for information about using the Palm Media desktop application. If you want to manage photos and videos directly from the location in which they're stored, you can find your pictures and videos in the following locations: Windows: • My Documents\ My Photos\Palm Photos\ \Internal • My Documents\ My Photos\Palm Photos\ \Expansion Card • My Documents\ My Videos\Palm Videos\ \Internal • My Documents\ My Videos\Palm Videos\ \Expansion Card Mac: • 122 Mac HD : Users : : Pictures : Palm Photos : : Internal • Mac HD : Users : : Pictures : Palm Photos : : Expansion Card • Mac HD : Users : : Movies : Palm Videos : : Internal • Mac HD : Users : : Movies : Palm Videos : : Expansion Card Pocket Tunes™ BEFORE YOU BEGIN Mac You need an expansion card (sold separately) to listen to music on your smartphone. You cannot transfer MP3 files from your Mac directly onto your smartphone. You can listen to music through the speaker on the back of your smartphone or through the stereo headset included with your smartphone. (If you want to use stereo headphones with a 3.5mm connector, then a 2.5mm stereo adapter is required, sold separately).To listen to music on your smartphone, you need to convert the music files into MP3 format using Windows Media Player (Windows computers) or iTunes (Mac computers), and then transfer the music files to your smartphone or an expansion card. After you transfer the music files, you can play them using the Pocket Tunes™ application on your smartphone. You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version that supports more music file formats (such as WMA); supports subscription music; and includes additional features. For more info, visit www.pocket-tunes.com/palm. TIP 3 On your computer, open Windows Media Player, and then click the full-screen icon in the upper-right corner to maximize the window. 6 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 4 Click Tools, and then click Options. 5 Click the Rip Music tab, click the Format pick list, and then select mp3. Click OK. 6 Click Tools, and then click Options. 7 Click the Devices tab, select Palm Handheld from the Devices list, and then click Properties. DID YOU KNOW? If a call comes in when you’re listening to music, you can take the call and the music pauses automatically. After you finish the call, the music starts again. Setting up Windows Media Player for MP3 On a Windows computer, you need to set Windows Media Player to save your music files in MP3 format in order for the files to be compatible with Pocket Tunes. 1 Connect your smartphone to your computer with the sync cable. 2 Press Applications pTunes . and select Select your smartphone Click Properties 8 Click the Quality tab, uncheck the Convert files as required by this handheld (recommended) box. Click Apply. 123 YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC CHAPTER 6 4 Click the Import Using pop-up menu and select MP3 Encoder. Uncheck box 5 (Optional) Click the Setting pop-up menu and select Good Quality. TIP Mac If you want greater control over the file size and sound quality of your MP3 files, select Custom from the Setting pop-up menu. Transferring MP3 files from your computer 9 Click OK, and then click OK again. You now have set up Windows Media Player to transfer MP3 files to the Pocket Tunes application on your smartphone. Setting up iTunes for MP3 On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X) to convert music from a CD to MP3 format. For more information on using the iTunes software, see the documentation that came with your Mac. 1 On your Mac, open iTunes. 2 Select Preferences. 3 Click the Advanced button at the top of the window, and then click Importing. 124 The Pocket Tunes software that comes with your smartphone is compatible with the popular MP3 audio file format. If your MP3 files are already on your computer’s hard drive, you need to transfer them to your smartphone to listen to them on your smartphone. If an expansion card is inserted into the smartphone, Windows Media Player copies the MP3 files to the expansion card. If you don’t have an expansion card inserted, the MP3 files are copied to your smartphone’s memory. IMPORTANT You must synchronize your smartphone with your computer at least once before you can transfer MP3 files from your computer. 1 Connect your smartphone to your computer with the USB sync cable. 2 On your smartphone, press Applications and select pTunes . 3 If you are transferring MP3 files from a Mac, insert an expansion card into your smartphone. This step is optional for Windows users. 4 Do one of the following: file name, and the destination (card). Click OK. Synchronize your smartphone with your computer. Be patient; transferring music to an expansion card can take several minutes. 6 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC DID YOU KNOW? You can also use a card reader accessory (sold separately) to transfer MP3 files from your computer to your expansion card. Create a Music_Audio folder in the root directory of the card, and store your MP3 files in this folder. Transferring music from a CD to your smartphone WINDOWS ONLY Open Windows Media Player on your computer. Select the Sync tab, and then select Palm Handheld from the drop-down list. Select Start Sync. The files are transferred to your smartphone. NOTE Do not press the sync button on your cable. Windows Media Player transfers the files, so there’s no need to do anything. MAC ONLY Drag and drop the MP3 files onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder. Select your device name, the If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your smartphone, you need to convert them to MP3 format on your computer before you transfer the files to your smartphone. WINDOWS ONLY 1 On your computer, open Windows Media Player. 2 Insert the music CD into your computer’s CD drive. 3 Select the Rip tab. 125 CHAPTER 6 YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 4 Select the tracks you want to convert to MP3. 5 Select Rip Music. 6 Transfer the MP3 files to your smartphone as described in Transferring MP3 files from your computer. 1 Make sure the Ringer switch is set to the Sound On position. See Silencing sounds for more information. 2 Press Applications pTunes . and select You can change the settings on your smartphone so that pressing and holding the Side button opens Pocket Tunes. See Reassigning buttons for details. TIP MAC ONLY 1 On your Mac, open iTunes. 2 Insert the music CD into the CD drive on your Mac. 3 Do any of the following: 3 Check the boxes next to the tracks you want to convert to MP3. • To play or resume playback of the current song, select Play . 4 Click the Import button in the upper-right corner of the iTunes window. • To play the next song, select Next Song . • To play the previous song, select Previous Song . • To play a different song, select Choose Song and select a song from the list. • To adjust the volume during playback, press the Volume button on the side of your smartphone. • To pause playback select Pause 5 When the songs are finished importing, click the Eject Disk button in the lower-right corner of the iTunes window. 6 Transfer the MP3 files to your smartphone as described in Transferring MP3 files from your computer. Listening to music on your Treo smartphone CAUTION Protect your hearing. Listening to this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your hearing. 126 . You can also press Space to pause and resume playback, as well as use the 5-way to navigate among songs or pause and resume playback. DID YOU KNOW? 1 Press Applications pTunes . 2 Press Menu and select 6 CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC . 3 Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists. 4 Select New, and then enter a name for the playlist. Progress indicator 5 Select Add Song. Select the songs you want to include on the playlist. Play/Pause Choose Song Previous song Next song Volume Pocket Tunes continues playing until it reaches the end of your list or until you select Pause . Music continues to play even if you switch to another application or turn off your screen. If you want to stop playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes, open the Background Prefs menu and uncheck the Enable background play box, and then select OK. 6 Select Save List. To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play, and then select All. TIP Creating a playlist If you want to play a group of songs in a particular order, you can create a playlist. 127 CHAPTER 6 YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC Editing a playlist 1 Press Applications pTunes . 2 Press Menu • To add a song, select Add Song, check a song’s box, and then select Done. • To move a song up or down one slot, select a song and then select Up or Down. and select . 3 Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists. 4 Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit. 5 Do any of the following: • 128 To delete a song from the playlist, select the song and then select Remove. 6 Select Save List. To delete a playlist, select Manage Playlists from the Actions menu, select the playlist, and then select Delete List. Select Yes to confirm the deletion. TIP CHAPT ER 7 Your personal information organizer Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone is all you need to organize your personal information and keep it with you wherever you go. You never lose your information, even if your battery is completely drained. All of your personal info is backed up each time you synchronize, and your info is kept private when you use the security features on your smartphone. Also, you can easily share info with others electronically. Benefits • Track current, future, and past appointments • Make to-do lists that get done • Set reminders for appointments, birthdays, important tasks, and more • Before you call your friend in London, check the time first In this chapter Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Contacts 2 Select the Contacts favorite button. 7 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER You can also open Contacts from Applications View. Press Applications and select Contacts. TIP Contacts is where you enter information about people you know. You can access this info from the Phone application to dial phone numbers and create favorites, and from the Messaging and email applications to send messages. When you create a contact, you can also assign a photo and ringtone ID to that contact, so you know when they call you. 3 Select New Contact. 4 Use the 5-way to move between fields as you enter information. DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to sync Contacts directly with the server. See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for info. 5 (Optional) Do any of the following: Adding a contact If you have several contacts to enter, it’s more efficient to use Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer and then sync your smartphone with your computer. For more info see Synchronizing information—the basics. TIP 1 Press Phone Add a caller ID photo: Select the Picture box, and then do one of the following: • Select Camera to take a picture and add it to this contact when you save the picture. • Select Photos to add an existing picture to this contact. . 131 CHAPTER 7 YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone from the list to give incoming calls from this contact a distinctive ring. Place the entry in a category or mark it private: Select Details. (See Working Display additional fields for this contact: Select Plus . 6 After you enter all the information, select Done. Last name (SMI for Smith) • First initial and last name (JSM for John Smith) 2 Select the name of the entry you want to open. 3 Select Edit. with private entries for more info.) Add a note to an entry: Select Note • . 4 Make changes to the entry as necessary, and then select Done. In the Contacts list, press Up or Down on the 5-way to move to the previous or next Contacts record. TIP Deleting a contact You can assign a ringtone to an entire category of contacts. For example, use a special ringtone for categories such as Family, Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit Categories, and then select the category. Select the ringtone on the Edit Category screen. TIP Viewing or changing contact information 1 In the Contacts list, begin entering one of the following for the contact you want to view or edit: • 132 First name (JOH for John) 1 Open the contact you want to delete. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Delete Contact from the Record menu, and then select OK. Defining your business card 1 Create a new contact and enter your own business card info. 2 Open the contact entry containing your business card info. 3 Press Menu . 4 Select Business Card from the Record menu. After you define your business card, you can beam it to other Palm OS® devices. In any Phone view or the Contacts application, open the Record menu and select Beam Business Card. TIP Calendar Displaying your calendar • 7 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER Press Calendar repeatedly to cycle through the various views: Agenda View: Shows your daily schedule, the number of unread email messages, and any items on your Tasks list that are overdue or due today. If there’s room, Agenda View also lists events on future dates. Day View: Shows your daily schedule one day at a time. Calendar is a powerful organizer application that helps you manage your schedule. You can view your calendar by day, week, or month, or as an agenda list that combines your Tasks list and email notifications with your appointments. Schedule repeating meetings or block out a vacation by creating one event set to repeat at an interval you specify. Color-code your appointments by category and add notes with helpful information. DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to synchronize Calendar events directly with the server. See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for information. Week View: Shows your schedule for an entire week. The time frames are based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences. Month View: Shows your schedule for a whole month. 133 CHAPTER 7 YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER • From any Calendar view, open the Options menu and select Year View to view a calendar for an entire year. • From any Calendar view (except Agenda View), use the 5-way to go to another day, week, month, or year (based on the current view). • 1 Press Calendar appears. 2 Press Left or Right desired day. Selected date From any Calendar view (except Agenda View), select Go To, and then select a date from the calendar. You can customize your smartphone to display the most current Calendar event in the Main View in the Phone application. Press Phone, open the Options menu, and then select Phone Display Options. Check the Show Calendar event box. TIP Creating an event If you have several appointments to enter, it’s more efficient to use Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer and then synchronize your smartphone with your computer. For more information, see Synchronizing information— the basics. TIP until Day View to select the Selected day 3 Select New. 4 Using the keyboard, enter a starting hour and minute for the event, such as 545 for 5:45. 5 Select the End Time box and enter the ending hour and minute for the event. 6 (Optional) To assign a time zone to the event, select the Time Zone pick list and select a city in the time zone you want. 7 Select OK. 8 Enter a description for the event. IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop software, do not add time zones to your 134 events. Palm Desktop does not support time zones. If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use the time zone feature, but you must install the conduit that came with your Treo 700P smartphone (or a subsequent update) on all the computers with which you sync your smartphone. Chapura PocketMirror and other earlier Microsoft Outlook conduits do not support time zones. To automatically assign a time zone to your events, open the Options menu, select Preferences, and check the New events use time zones box. All your new events will be assigned to your local time zone (existing events aren’t affected), and you can change the time zone setting for individual events. TIP If you want your events with time zones to stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless of the time zone you are in, uncheck the Get time zone from mobile network box on the Date & Time Preferences screen. If the box is checked, the event time shifts if you travel to a different time zone. See Setting the date and time for information. Adding an alarm to an event 7 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 1 In Calendar, select the event. 2 Select Details. 3 Check the Alarm box and select the number of minutes, hours, or days before the event that you would like to receive the alarm. The alarm for untimed events is defined by minutes, days, or hours before midnight of the date of the event. TIP 4 Select OK. Type of time units TIP Number of time units When an alarm occurs, the Alert screen displays all your pending alerts. Select an alert description to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that alert. DID YOU KNOW? 135 CHAPTER 7 YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER Scheduling a repeating event Creating an untimed event An untimed event, such as a holiday or deadline, does not occur at a particular time. TIP 1 Press Calendar View. TIP until you are in Day 2 Press Left or Right date of the event. to go to the To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this info to the person’s Contacts entry and it automatically appears in your Calendar. To enter a holiday, create an untimed event. Then, from the Details screen, select Every year as the repeat interval. 3 Make sure no times are highlighted. 1 Create an event, and then select it. 4 Enter a description for the event. A diamond appears next to the description of an untimed event. 2 Select Details. 3 Select the Repeat pick list, and then select a repeat interval. If the interval you need doesn’t appear on the list, select Other to define a custom interval. 4 Select OK. 136 4 Do one of the following: This icon indicates a repeating event. • To create a new category, select New and then enter a category name. • To add a color to an existing category, select a category and select Edit. 7 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 5 Select the color you want to give this category, and then select OK. 6 (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add or edit more categories. DID YOU KNOW? If you sync with Microsoft Outlook and your events include other people, a With field appears in the Details dialog box and your attendee info appears in this field after you sync. 7 Select OK two more times. Now that the categories are set up with colors, you can assign categories to your events to color-code them. See the next section for details. Color-coding your schedule Use color-coding to quickly spot various types of events. For example, make appointments with family green, coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow these steps to create a category and assign it a color-code. 1 From Day View, select an event description or select an empty timeslot. 2 Select Details. 3 Select the Category pick list and select Edit Categories. Editing or deleting an event 1 Select the event you want to edit or delete. 2 Select Details. 3 In addition to the settings covered earlier in this chapter, you can also change any of the following settings: Date and Time: Displays when the event takes place. Change these settings to reschedule the event. 137 CHAPTER 7 YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER Location: Provides a description of where the event takes place. Category: Sets the color-coded category for this event. : Provides space for you to enter additional text. Note Delete: Removes the event from your calendar. 4 Select OK. To save memory, you can purge your old events. Open the Record menu and select Purge. Select the Delete events older than pick list and select a time frame. Select OK. TIP Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are due today and the tasks that are overdue appear in Agenda View. Show Messages: The number of read and unread email messages displays in Agenda View. Background: A favorite photo becomes Customizing display options for your calendar 1 Press Menu . 2 Select Options, and then select Display Options. 3 Select the Default View pick list and select the view you want to see when you open Calendar. 4 Select Agenda and set any of the following options: 138 the Agenda View background. Check the Background box, select the image placeholder, and then select a photo. Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo. 5 Select Day and set any of the following Day View options: indicate under which category the event is filed. 7 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 6 Select Month and set any of the following Month View options: Show Category List: The Category pick list appears in Day View. Show Time Bars: The time bars appear in Day View to show the duration of an event and to illustrate event conflicts. Compress Day View: When this box is unchecked, all time slots appear on the screen. When this box is checked, start and end times appear for each event, but blank time slots near the bottom of the screen disappear to minimize scrolling. Show Category Column: The color-coded category marker appears between the time and the description to Show Category List: The Category pick list appears in Month View. Timed Events: The events that are scheduled for a specific time appear in Month View. Untimed Events: The events that are scheduled for a specific date but not a specific time appear in Month View. Daily Repeating Events: The events that repeat every day appear in Month View. 7 Select OK. 139 CHAPTER 7 YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER Selecting alarm tones 1 Press Menu Reminder Sound: The tone played if an alarm is not acknowledged and the alarm repeats itself. . 2 Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences. Repeat: The number of times the alarm 3 Select the Application pick list and select Calendar. repeats itself if the alarm is not acknowledged. 4 Select the Volume pick list and select the volume level. Default Alarm: The default timeframe for the alarm field. 5 Select the Vibrate pick list and select an option for how you want your smartphone to vibrate for an event alarm. 6 Select tones from any of the following pick lists: 7 Select Done. You can also record sounds and use them as alarms. Select Manage on the Sound & Alerts Preferences screen. TIP To record a sound, select New. To play a sound, select it and press Center on the 5-way. • To delete a sound, select it and press Backspace. • To send a sound, select it and then select Send. DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a silent alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. • • Alarm Sound: The tone played the first time your alarm goes off. 140 World Clock World Clock displays the day and time in three cities anywhere around the globe. Whether you’re traveling or staying home, it’s easy to keep track of the best time to reach your business associates, friends, and family in faraway places. one of these two cities, so that you always know what time it is at home. 1 Press Applications World Clock . 7 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER and select 2 Select a City pick list, and select a city in the same time zone as the city you want to track. If you did not select the option to get the date and time from the mobile network, then you can set the city at the top of the screen to a fixed location. TIP Selecting cities World Clock shows the system date and time above the world map. If you selected the option to get the date and time from the mobile network (see Setting the date and time), the your wireless service provider network automatically updates the time display to match the local time when you travel. Below the world map you can view the time in two other cities. If you travel a lot you may want to select your home city as You can run your stylus over the map to see the time in other cities. The shadow over the map represents nighttime moving across the globe. DID YOU KNOW? World Clock does not automatically update the system time for daylight savings time. To change the Daylight Savings Time setting, see Setting the date and time. TIP 141 CHAPTER 7 YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER Adding cities 1 Select Off in the upper-right corner. If the city you want to display is not in the predefined list, you can add it. 2 Select the time you want the alarm to sound. 1 Select a City pick list and select Edit List. 3 Select OK. 2 Select Add. 3 Select a location in the same time zone as the city you want to add, and then select OK. To customize the alarm sound and volume, open the Options menu and select Alarm Preferences. TIP Make sure the Ringer switch is set to Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm. TIP 4 Enter the name of the city. 5 Select Location, select Map, select the location of the city, and then select OK. Tasks 6 If the city does not observe Daylight Savings Time, uncheck this box. If Daylight Savings Time is observed, enter Start and End dates. You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks you need to complete and to keep a record of when you finish tasks. 7 Select OK. Adding a task Setting an alarm The next time you travel, don’t rely on a hotel alarm clock to get you to that important meeting. Use your smartphone instead. World Clock includes a built-in alarm feature that you can use as a travel alarm. 142 1 Press Applications Tasks . and select 2 Select New to create a new task. You can also select the priority from the Tasks list by selecting the number next to a task and then selecting a priority level. TIP 7 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 3 Enter a description of the task. The text can be longer than one line. Setting task priority, due date, and other details The Details dialog box enables you to assign a priority level, due date, category, privacy flag, and other details for each task. 1 Select the task to which you want to assign details. 2 Select Details. 3 Set any of the following: Priority: Select the priority number for this task (1 is most important). Later you can arrange your tasks based on the importance of each task. Category: Assign the task to a specific category. Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list and select a due date for the task. If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can change the due date later by selecting the task’s due date in the Tasks list. TIP Alarm: Set an alarm for this task. Repeat: Indicate whether the task occurs at regular intervals and how often it repeats. When you check off a repeating task, the next instance of this 143 CHAPTER 7 YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER task automatically appears in your task list. If you accidentally check off a task and need to uncheck it, highlight the task again and press Center on the 5-way to uncheck it. TIP Private: Check this box to mark this task private. See Working with private entries for additional information. You can set Tasks to record the date that you completed a task, and you can select to show or hide completed tasks. Completed tasks remain in the memory of your smartphone until you purge them. TIP : Select this button to enter additional text that you want to associate with the task. Overdue tasks have an exclamation point (!) next to the due date. DID YOU KNOW? 4 Select OK. Press Menu to access other features such as importing phone numbers into the Tasks list. TIP Checking off a task Organizing your tasks In the Tasks list, select one of these options: • All: Displays all your tasks. • Date: Displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame. Select the Date pick list (in the title bar) to select Due 1 Select the task you want to check off. 2 Press Center or tap in the box to check off the task. 144 Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or Past Due. 7 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER Deleting a task 1 Select the task you want to delete. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Delete Task from the Record menu. 4 Select OK. To save memory, you can purge all completed tasks. Open the Record menu and select Purge. Select OK. TIP • Category: Displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category. Select the Category pick list to select a different category. Customizing Tasks Tasks Preferences enable you to control the appearance of the Tasks list. 1 In the Tasks list, press Menu . 145 CHAPTER 7 YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 2 Select Options, and then select Preferences. 3 Set any of the following preferences: Sort by: Indicates the order in which your tasks appear in the list. Show Completed Tasks: Displays tasks you’ve checked off. Show Priorities: Displays the priority setting for each task. Show Categories: Displays the category for each task. Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks. 4 Select OK. Record Completion Date: Replaces due date with the completion date when you complete (check off) the task. Show Due Dates: Displays task due dates and inserts an exclamation point (!) next to overdue tasks. 146 You can display your tasks in your calendar. See Customizing display options for your calendar for details. DID YOU KNOW? CHAPT ER 8 Your memos and documents With its ability to store large amounts of important information, your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone lets you take your office with you—including your Microsoft Office and PDF files. You can keep updated copies of the files on both your smartphone and your computer so that you can work on them in the most convenient location any time. Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos to type notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items, and other important thoughts, and play them back, right on your smartphone. You can even send your notes and voice memos to a friend or colleague by attaching them to an email message. Benefits • Manage Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and PDF files on your smartphone • Improve productivity by taking important docs, spreadsheets, and presentations with you • Capture thoughts on the fly In this chapter Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Documents To Go Professional ® NOTE The Palm Software Installation CD includes the Documents To Go® desktop software. On your smartphone, the companion application for Documents To Go is named Documents. With the Documents application, you can take your important office info with you. You can carry, create, view, and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on your smartphone. You can also view, carry, and manage PowerPoint and PDF files. For example, you can open email attachments, files you download with the web browser, and files stored on an expansion card—as long as the files are in a supported format. If you install the Documents To Go desktop software (from the Palm Software Installation CD), you can use Documents To Go to transfer files to your smartphone when you synchronize. Here are a few more examples of what you can do with Documents: • Send and receive email attachments in Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF). • View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF). • Create or edit a Word-compatible document or Excel-compatible spreadsheet on your smartphone, and then save it in the native DOC or XLS format. • Create a PowerPoint presentation on your computer, use the Documents To Go desktop application to optimize the file for your smartphone, and then sync the file onto your smartphone. View or edit the file on your smartphone, and then sync again to transfer the changes to the original PowerPoint file on your computer. 8 CHAPTER YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS NOTE The Documents application does not support some editing functions, such as multiple font sizes and spell checking. 149 CHAPTER 8 YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS For more info on the Documents To Go desktop application, click the Documents To Go icon on your computer, and then click Help, or go to www.dataviz.com. TIP Install the Files application from the Palm Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card. TIP When you work on a file on your smartphone, you can save it to your smartphone or an expansion card. Open the File menu, select Save As, and then select the location where you want to save the file. TIP Memos Opening a document In the Documents application, you can view and open any Word, Excel, PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your smartphone or an expansion card that is inserted in the expansion slot. 1 Press Applications Documents . Memos are a great way to store notes on your Treo 700P smartphone. Each memo can include 4,096 characters of text. DID YOU KNOW? and select Creating a memo 1 Press Applications Memos . and select 2 Enter the text you want to appear in the memo. 3 Select Done. 2 Select the document you want from the list. 150 important thoughts directly on your smartphone. 8 CHAPTER YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS Creating a voice memo When recording a voice memo, face your smartphone’s screen while speaking. You can assign categories to your memos. Open the memo you want to change, select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and select a category. TIP Deleting a memo The memo is automatically saved to your smartphone. 2 (Optional) Enter a title for the memo. You can also access Voice Memo by pressing Applications and selecting Voice Memo. TIP 1 Open the memo you want to delete. 2 Press Menu 1 Press and hold the Side button on your smartphone while recording your memo. After you finish recording, release the Side button. . 3 Select Delete Memo from the Record menu. 4 Select OK. Voice Memo Voice Memo provides a place for you to record and play back notes and other If you need to pause while recording, press and hold Center on the 5-way. Release the button to resume recording. TIP Your recording pauses automatically when you receive a call. If you ignore the call, you can press Center on the 5-way to resume recording. If you answer the call, recording stops and saves; you cannot resume a previous recording; you must start another voice memo. DID YOU KNOW? 151 CHAPTER 8 YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS Listening to a voice memo 1 Press Applications Voice Memo . and select 2 In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the voice memo title and then press Center to select it. The voice memo begins to play. 3 Press Center playback. 152 to pause or stop To adjust the volume level, press the Volume button on the side of your smartphone. TIP To change a voice memo title, open the Voice Memo menu and select Rename Memo. TIP DID YOU KNOW? You can send a voice memo in an email (see the documentation for your email application). You can also use Bluetooth wireless technology to send a voice memo to a nearby Bluetooth device (see Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless connection). CHAPT ER 9 Your application and info management tools Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up info on your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone. Synchronizing simply means that info you entered or updated in one place (your smartphone or your computer) is automatically updated in the other. There’s no need to enter info twice. Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and to install and run cool games and other software, from dictionaries to travel guides. Benefits • Locate info in your applications with the Find feature • Install applications, games, and other software • Quickly enter, update, and protect your info on your computer and your smartphone • Store, carry, and exchange info In this chapter Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Sending information with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . 162 Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS Using Find The Find feature locates any text in the built-in applications and databases and in some third-party applications. The Find feature searches for the group of characters you specify, including characters that are part of a word. Find is not case sensitive. DID YOU KNOW? Find locates any word that begins with the text you enter. For example, entering “plan” finds “planet,” but not “airplane.” 1 Press Option , and then press Shift/ Find to open the Find dialog box. 2 Enter the text you want to find. 3 Select OK to start the search. 4 In the search results, select the text you want to review, or select Find More to continue the search. Viewing and using the alerts The Alert screen on your smartphone shows info about incoming items such as new email messages and Calendar events. The Alert screen also notifies you if you miss a phone call. To view the Alert screen, tap the blinking bell when it appears in the upper-left corner of any screen, or press and hold Center when the blinking bell appears. You can do any of the following: • Check the box to clear an alert from the list. 155 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS • Select the alert to open the corresponding application and view the alert item (message, event, missed call, and so on). • Select Done to close the Alert screen and return to whatever you were doing on your smartphone before you opened the Alert screen. The bell continues to blink in the upper-left corner of the screen. • Select Clear All to delete all alerts on the Alert screen. Calculator Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus an advanced calculator with scientific, financial, and conversion functions. Switching between Basic and Advanced Calculator Modes 1 Press Applications Calc . 2 Press Menu and select . 3 Select Options, and then select Advanced Mode or Basic Mode. 156 In Basic Mode, you can also press Right on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode. In Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way to cycle between functions, and press Left on the 5-way to return to Basic Mode. TIP You can tap the onscreen number pad or use the keyboard to input numbers. DID YOU KNOW? Selecting functions in Advanced Calculator Mode Area: Area conversions for metric, 1 Switch to Advanced Mode (see the preceding procedure). Volume: Volume conversions for metric and English values. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Options, and then select the type of function you want to use: Math: Advanced mathematical functions such as exponents, roots, and logarithms. Trig: Trigonometric functions such as sine, cosine, tangent, and variants. traditional, and English values. 4 Press Menu 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS . 5 Select Pref, and then select the decimal display format: Float, Fixed(x), Sci(x), or Eng(x). 6 Press Menu . 7 Select Pref, and then select the number display format: Degrees, Radians, or Grads. Finance: Financial calculator functions such as APR and amortization. Logic: Hexadecimal characters in keypad, plus logic functions such as And, Not, Or, and Xor. Statistics: Statistical functions such as sum, factorial, and random number generator. Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature conversions for metric and English values. Length: Length conversions for metric and English values. Select Sto to store a number in one of ten memory slots. Select Rcl to recall a stored number. TIP Select Con to access a list of mathematical constants such as Avogadro’s number or the speed of light. TIP Installing applications Your smartphone comes with several built-in and ready-to-use applications. You can also install additional applications, such as business software, games, and more. 157 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS The Palm Software Installation CD includes several bonus software apps and you can purchase other third-party Palm OS® apps as well. To learn about applications you can add to your smartphone, go to www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo. NOTE The instructions in this section tell you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS application) and PDB (Palm OS database) files on your Treo smartphone. Some Palm OS software uses an installer or wizard to guide you through the process. For details, consult the documentation that came with the software. Installing bonus software from the CD The Palm Software Installation CD includes several bonus software applications that you can install on your smartphone. You can install these applications when you install the desktop software, or you can install them later. 1 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your computer. 2 Click Install bonus software. 3 Click the name of the application you want to install. 158 4 Click Install (on the right side of the screen). 5 (Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional applications. 6 Synchronize your smartphone with your computer to install the application(s) on your Treo smartphone. Installing applications from the Internet You can use the web browser on your smartphone to install Palm OS files (PRC or PDB) directly from the Internet. When you download a PRC or PDB file, it is automatically installed on your smartphone. If a file is compressed (ZIP or SIT files), you need to download it to your computer and expand the file before installing it on your smartphone. 1 Open the web browser (see Viewing a web page). 2 Go to the page that contains the link to the application you want to download. 3 Press Left or Right to highlight the link to the file, and then press Center to initiate the download process. 4 Follow the onscreen instructions to accept and install the application. 2 Select your device name from the User list, and then click OK. Installing applications from a computer 3 Synchronize your smartphone with your computer to install the application(s) on your Treo smartphone. BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an app from your computer to your Treo smartphone, you must first install Palm Desktop software on your computer (see Installing the desktop synchronization software). When you download an application to your computer, it is probably in a compressed format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is compressed, you need to use a decompression utility on your computer, such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander, before you install the application on your smartphone. 1 Windows: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop. Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the Send To Device droplet in the Palm folder. 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS You can open a window to select whether to install files on your smartphone or on an expansion card. TIP Windows: Double-click the Palm Quick Install icon. Mac: Open the HotSync menu and select Install Handheld files. On a Windows computer, you can also access Palm™ Quick Install by selecting the Quick Install icon in Palm® Desktop software or from the Programs folder in the Start menu. TIP Getting help with third-party applications If you encounter a problem with a third-party application (such as an error message), contact the application’s author or vendor. For general troubleshooting of third-party applications, see Third-party applications. 159 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS Removing applications 2 If you want to remove an application from an expansion card, insert the card into your Treo smartphone. If you decide that you no longer need an application, or you want to free up memory, you can remove apps from your smartphone or an expansion card (for more on expansion cards, see Inserting and removing expansion cards). You can remove only apps, patches, and extensions that you install; you cannot remove the built-in apps that reside in the ROM portion of your Treo smartphone. 4 Select Delete on the App menu. 3 Press Menu DID YOU KNOW? Some applications are factory-installed on your smartphone and cannot be deleted. These are listed with a Lock icon next to them. Applications deleted from your smartphone are kept on your computer in the Archive folder of your user folder. If you’re having trouble locating your user folder, see I can’t find my user folder. DID YOU KNOW? 1 Press Applications 160 . . 5 Select the Delete From pick list and select the location of the application you want to remove: Phone or Card. 6 Select the application that you want to remove. 7 Select Delete. 8 Synchronize to remove the application from the Backup folder on your computer. Manually deleting applications If an app you delete reappears on your smartphone, you may need to manually delete the app from your computer. 1 Locate your Backup subfolder on your computer. Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\ . Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\ . 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS If you upgraded from a previous version of Palm Desktop, your Backup subfolder may be located in the palmOne or Handspring folder. 2 If you find a PRC or PDB file for the application you just removed, delete the file from the Backup subfolder. 3 Delete the file from your device again. Viewing application info The Info screens display basic statistics about the applications on your Treo smartphone. 1 Press Applications 2 Press Menu . . 3 Select Info on the App menu. Version: The version numbers of applications on your smartphone. Size: The size (in kilobytes) of applications and information on your smartphone. Records: The number of entries in various applications on your smartphone. 5 Scroll to the application you want to see info about. 6 Select Done. 4 Select the Device pick list and select the location of the app you want to view info for: Phone or . 161 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS Sending information with Bluetooth® wireless technology 4 Select the entry or category you want to send. You cannot send an item that has a lock next to it. 5 Press Menu . 6 Select Send from the leftmost menu. 7 Select Bluetooth, and then select OK. The range of Bluetooth® wireless technology is up to 30 feet (10 meters) in optimum environmental conditions. Performance and range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors. 9 Wait for a message to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your smartphone. Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless connection Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless connection In most applications you can send an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture. You can also send all the entries in a category, such as all contacts in the Business category. 1 Press Applications Bluetooth . 1 Press Applications Bluetooth . 5 Select Send from the App menu. 2 Select Bluetooth On. 3 Open an application. 162 and select 8 Select the receiving device(s) in the Discovery Results list, and then select OK. and select 2 Select Bluetooth On. 3 Press Applications 4 Press Menu . . 6 Select the Send From pick list and select the location of the app you want to send: Phone or . 7 Select the application you want to transfer. You cannot send an item that has a lock next to it. 8 Select Send. 9 Select Bluetooth, and then select OK. 10 Select the receiving device(s) on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK. 11 Wait for a message to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your smartphone. Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to request a connection with your smartphone during the next two minutes. Your smartphone reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to other devices after two minutes. 4 Use the other device to discover your smartphone and send information to it: • See the other device’s documentation to learn how to discover and send information over a Bluetooth wireless connection. • If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On , your smartphone beeps to notify you of the connection, and then prompts you to accept the info. Select a category or expansion card to file the item. If you don't select a category, the item goes into the Unfiled category. Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless connection 1 Press Applications Bluetooth . and select 2 Select Bluetooth On. 3 Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following: Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to request a connection with your smartphone. Your smartphone remains accessible to other devices until you turn this option off. After you’re done using this setting, remember to change it back to Hidden. 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 5 Select Yes to receive the information or No to refuse it. 163 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS Beaming an entry The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is the name other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology see when they connect to your smartphone. The default name is the name you gave your device during setup. You can change this name if you want to. TIP DID YOU KNOW? When you receive an application over a Bluetooth connection, you can store the application on your smartphone or send it to an expansion card inserted into the expansion card slot. Beam your business card in two key presses: From the Main View in the Phone application, press Menu, and then press the M key. TIP Beaming information 1 Select the entry or category you want to beam. You cannot beam an item that has a lock next to it. Your Treo 700P smartphone is equipped with an IR (infrared) port so that you can beam information to another Palm OS® device with an IR port. The IR port is located on the top of your smartphone, between the antenna and the Ringer switch, behind the small dark shield. 2 Press Menu For best results, the path between the two devices must be clear of obstacles, and both devices must be stationary. If you have difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and avoid bright sunlight. TIP 164 You can beam an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture. You can also beam all the entries in the selected category, such as all the contacts in the Business or Family category. . 3 Select Record, and then select one of the following: Beam: Sends an individual record. Beam Category: Sends all entries in the current category. If you beam a bookmark or saved page from the web browser, it beams the URL, not the contents of that page. DID YOU KNOW? 4 When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your Treo smartphone directly at the IR port of the receiving device. 5 Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your smartphone. 2 Press Menu . 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 3 Select Beam from the App menu. 4 Select the Beam From pick list, and select whether the application you want to beam is located on your Treo smartphone or on an expansion card. 5 Select the application you want to transfer. 6 Select Beam. 7 When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your smartphone directly at the IR port of the receiving device. 8 Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your smartphone. Receiving beamed information 1 Turn on your screen. 2 Select the beam command on the transmitting device. Beaming an application Not all applications can be beamed. A lock icon appears on the Beam screen next to applications that cannot be beamed. 1 Press Applications . 3 Point the IR port on your Treo smartphone directly at the IR port of the transmitting device to open the Beam Status dialog box. 165 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 4 When the Beam Status dialog box appears, select a category for the entry. 5 Select Yes to receive the information or No to refuse it. If you do not select a category upon receiving a beamed item, the item is placed in the Unfiled category. Synchronizing information— advanced TIP If you can’t receive beamed information, make sure the Beam Receive option is turned on (see Optimizing power settings), and that you are not running a third-party application that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your smartphone). TIP DID YOU KNOW? You can store a beamed application on your smartphone, or send it to an expansion card inserted into the expansion card slot. Changing which applications sync By default, information from Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Pics&Videos, and Tasks is updated each time you synchronize your smartphone with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook. You can change which applications synchronize. For example, if you don’t use the Memos application and you want to speed up synchronization, you can turn off synchronization for Memos. Windows If you set up your smartphone to sync with Outlook, you can learn how to change which applications synchronize, by doing the following: Click the HotSync® manager icon in the taskbar and select Custom. Select a conduit that syncs with Outlook, click Change, and then click Help. TIP 166 WINDOWS ONLY 1 Click HotSync manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. 2 Select Custom. 3 Select your device name from the User list at the top of the screen. 4 Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off, and then click Change. 5 Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an app. Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an app that currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for Memos if you do not use this app). NOTE Select one of the two overwrite options if you want the information in one location (smartphone or computer) to completely replace the information in the other location for that app. For example, if the Calendar info on your smartphone is accurate but the info on your computer has become corrupted, select Handheld overwrites Desktop for the Calendar app to have your smartphone info replace your computer info. Note that “handheld” refers to your smartphone and “desktop” refers to your computer. 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 6 (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off. 7 Click OK, and then click Done. Windows To keep the current sync setting on an ongoing basis, check the Set as default box. If you do not check this box, the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize. Thereafter, info is updated according to the default setting. TIP 167 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS NOTE Select one of the two overwrite MAC ONLY 1 Double-click the Palm Desktop in the Palm folder. icon 2 From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings. 3 From the User pop-up menu, select your device name. 4 Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off, and then click Conduit Settings. 5 Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an app. Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an app that currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for Memos if you do not use this app). options if you want the information in one location (smartphone or computer) to completely replace the information in the other location for that app. For example, if the Calendar info on your smartphone is accurate but the info on your computer has become corrupted, select Handheld overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar app to have your smartphone info replace your computer info. Note that “handheld” refers to your smartphone. 6 (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off. 7 Click OK, and then close the Conduit Settings window. TIP Mac To keep the current setting on an ongoing basis, select Make Default. If you do not select this button, the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize. Thereafter, info is updated according to the default setting. 168 Setting up a Bluetooth connection for synchronization If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can synchronize wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection. 1 Press Applications Bluetooth . and select 2 Select Bluetooth On. 3 Enter a device name for your smartphone. This is the name that appears on the other Bluetooth device’s screen when it connects to your smartphone. 4 Select the Visibility pick list and select Visible or Temporary. After you form a partnership with a device, you can change the Visibility setting to Hidden. That way only devices with which you’ve already formed a partnership can find your smartphone. New devices cannot request a connection. TIP 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 5 Select Setup Devices. 6 Select HotSync Setup. 7 Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership between your smartphone and your computer. In some cases you may need to perform setup steps on your computer before you can complete this step. Check your computer’s documentation for specific setup instructions. 169 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 8 After you finish the HotSync Setup, select Done to return to Applications View. You’re now ready to sync your smartphone with your Bluetooth computer. 3 Select the pick list below the HotSync icon, and then select the name of the PC you set up for Bluetooth synchronization (see Setting up a Bluetooth connection for synchronization). Synchronizing over a Bluetooth connection 4 Select the HotSync smartphone. When you synchronize using your smartphone’s Bluetooth wireless feature, you don’t need your sync cable. This is especially useful if you travel with a laptop enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology. When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your smartphone screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes. 1 Press Applications HotSync . and select icon on your Synchronizing over an infrared connection BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your computer must include the following items: 2 Select Local. 170 • An enabled IR port and driver or have an IR device attached to it. Check your computer’s documentation to see if it supports IR communication. • HotSync manager must be active. On a Windows computer, you know HotSync manager is active when its icon appears in the lower-right corner of your screen. When you synchronize using your smartphone’s IR port, you don’t need a cable. This is especially useful if you travel with an IR-enabled laptop. 6 Select the HotSync smartphone. WINDOWS ONLY When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your smartphone screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes. 1 On your computer, click HotSync manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Make sure that Infrared is selected. icon on your 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS MAC ONLY 1 Double-click HotSync manager the Palm folder. in 2 Click the HotSync Controls tab, and then select Enabled. 3 Click the Connection Settings tab, and then check the On box next to IR port. 4 Close the HotSync Software Setup window. 2 On your smartphone, press Applications and select HotSync . 3 Select Local. 4 Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld. 5 Position the IR port of your smartphone within a few inches of the IR port of your computer. 5 On your smartphone, press Applications and select HotSync . 6 Select Local. 7 Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld. 8 Position the IR port of your smartphone within a few inches of the IR port of your computer. 9 Select the HotSync smartphone. icon on your 171 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your smartphone screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes. Using expansion cards The expansion card slot on your Treo smartphone enables you to add SD cards and MultiMediaCard cards to extend the storage capacity of your smartphone. For example, SD or MultiMediaCard expansion cards can store: 172 • Photos • MP3 audio files • Email attachments • Games • eBooks • Microsoft Office files • Adobe Acrobat files • Applications • Databases SD cards are faster than MultiMediaCard cards for reading and writing information, and SD cards also offer write-protection. TIP Your Treo 700P smartphone is also compatible with SDIO cards, which you can use to add accessories, such as a presentation module, to your smartphone. Although expansion cards are sold separately, your smartphone includes a dummy, nonfunctional card inside the expansion card slot to keep out dust and other debris. Inserting and removing expansion cards 1 Press down and release the dummy card. 2 After you feel the expansion card slot eject the dummy card, remove the card from the slot. 3 Hold your smartphone with the screen facing you, and hold the card with the label facing you. The notch on the card should be in the lower-left corner next to the antenna. 4 Insert the card into the expansion card slot until you feel it lock into place. Opening applications on an expansion card 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS After you insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot, you can open any of the applications stored on the expansion card. 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. Applications View automatically appears. Notch If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On, you hear a confirmation tone when you insert or remove an expansion card. TIP When you’re not using the expansion card, reinsert the dummy card to keep the expansion card slot clean. TIP 2 Select the icon for the application you want to open. 3 Press Center application. to open the Install the Files application from the Palm Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card. TIP 173 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS Accessing items stored on an expansion card When an expansion card contains items, such as pictures or songs, you can access those items directly from the card. You can copy applications from your Treo smartphone to your expansion card and vice versa. 1 Press Applications . 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. Applications View automatically appears. 2 Select the category pick list in the title bar, and select All. 3 Select the icon for the application in which you want to open the item. For example, to view a picture, select Pics&Videos. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Copy from the App menu. Copying applications between an expansion card and your smartphone Before you copy an application to an expansion card, make sure that it is compatible with Palm OS software version 5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work with expansion cards and do not allow you to store files in a location that is separate from the application. TIP 174 4 Select the Copy To pick list and select the destination: Phone or . 5 Select the From pick list and select the location of the application you want to copy: Phone or . 6 Highlight the application you want to copy. 7 Select Copy. Viewing expansion card information Renaming an expansion card 9 CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS If you change the contents of an expansion card, you may at some point want to rename the card to better match its contents. 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. 2 Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select All. The Card Info application displays general information about the expansion card that is currently in the expansion slot, and it enables you to rename and format a card. Press Applications Card Info . and select Before copying information to, renaming, or formatting an expansion card, make sure the card is not write-protected. See the instructions that came with your card for details. TIP 3 Select Card Info 4 Press Menu . . 5 Select Rename Card from the Card menu. 6 Enter a new name for the card. 7 Select OK. Formatting an expansion card Formatting an expansion card is similar to formatting a disk on a computer. When you format an expansion card, you erase all the information stored on the card. 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. 2 Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select All. 175 CHAPTER 9 YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 3 Select Card Info 4 Press Menu . . 5 Select Format Card from the Card menu. 176 6 Enter a new name for the card. 7 Select OK. CHAPT ER 10 Your personal settings Customizing your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone is great way to make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you. On your smartphone, you can easily customize the sounds, fonts, screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different levels of security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive) phone call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help extend the life of your smartphone battery. There are lots of ways to make your smartphone work better for you. Benefits • Access applications quickly • Make your screen easy to read • Conserve power • Enjoy your smartphone more In this chapter System sound settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 System sound settings When you slide the Ringer switch back to the Sound On position, it restores the previous sound settings. 10 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS Silencing sounds You can immediately silence all alerts, ringtones, music that plays through the built-in speaker, and system sounds by sliding the Ringer switch to the Sound Off position. This does not mute the audio during a phone call. Sound On Sound Off Setting system volume levels Your smartphone includes a silent alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. For info on setting the vibrate option, see the section on setting alert tones in the chapters that describe the individual applications. DID YOU KNOW? 1 Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound Off position. Your smartphone vibrates once to let you know that you’ve turned sounds off. 2 To hear all sounds again, slide the Ringer switch to the Sound On position. You can set the volume level for system sounds, such as the tone that plays when you synchronize. If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off, the ringer setting overrides the sound settings and all sounds are turned off. TIP 1 Press Applications Sounds . and select 2 Select the Application pick list and select System. 3 Select the System Volume and Game Volume pick lists and select the volume levels. 179 YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 10 Backlight 2 Press Left brightness. 4 Select Done. and Right to adjust the 3 Select Done. Display and appearance settings To automatically set the backlight to the preset low setting, press Option + Menu. TIP You can also adjust the backlight and set the brightness duration during a call in Power Preferences. See Optimizing power settings. TIP Adjusting the brightness Depending on the lighting conditions in which you’re using your smartphone, you may need to adjust the brightness of the screen and keyboard backlight. 1 Press Option Backlight . , and then press Changing the screen font You can change the screen font in Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging, Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary between applications and some applications may offer fewer choices. 1 Open the application in which you want to change the font. 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Options, and then select Font. 180 4 Select a font style. (In the web browser, select the Font size pick list and select Large or Small.) Small font Large font 3 Set any of the following preferences: 10 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS Preset to: The standard number conventions for your country. When you select a country, the other Formats Preferences are automatically set to that country’s conventions. You can also edit each option individually. Small Large bold bold font font 5 Select OK. Setting display formats Formats Preferences enable you to select number conventions based on geographic regions. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is expressed using a 24-hour clock. In the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in applications on your Treo smartphone use the Formats Preferences settings. 1 Press Applications Prefs . 2 Select Formats. and select Time: The time format. Select HH:MM to display a 24-hour clock. Date: The date format. Week starts: The first day of the week (usually Sunday or Monday). Numbers: The format for numbers with decimal points and commas. 4 Select Done. 181 CHAPTER 10 YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 3 Select a color scheme from the list. Aligning the screen Occasionally, your smartphone screen may need to be readjusted. If this occurs, you may see the wrong feature being activated when you tap the screen. To fix the problem, you can align the screen at any time. 1 Press Applications Prefs . and select 2 Select Touchscreen. 3 Follow the onscreen instructions and tap the screen where indicated. 4 Select Done. You can also set the wallpaper for the Main View in the Phone application (see Customizing the Main View in the Phone application) and the background for the Calendar Agenda View (see Customizing display options for your calendar). TIP Applications settings 4 Select Done. Changing the system color scheme 1 Press Applications Prefs . 2 Select Color Theme. 182 and select You can change the Applications settings on your smartphone so that you can easily access the applications you use most often. You can arrange and display your applications by category, reassign the buttons on your smartphone, and select default applications for specific tasks. Displaying applications by category Arranging applications by category • You can assign an application to a category and then display a specific category of applications in Applications View. Press Applications repeatedly to cycle through the categories. • Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select a category. Select All to display all of your applications. 1 Press Applications 2 Press Menu . Do one of the following: . 3 Select Category on the App menu. Changing Applications View 4 Select the pick list next to each application and select a category. By default, Applications View displays each application as an icon. As an alternative, you can view a list of applications. The list view is particularly useful when you have so many applications in a category that the applications fill up more than one screen. 5 Select Done. To create a new category, select the category pick list and select Edit Categories. Select New, and then enter the category name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and then select OK. TIP If there is an expansion card in the expansion slot, the card appears in the category pick list and is treated as a category when you press Applications repeatedly. DID YOU KNOW? 10 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 1 Press Applications 2 Press Menu . . 3 Select Options, and then select Preferences. 4 Select the View By pick list and select List. 5 Select OK. 183 CHAPTER 10 YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS Reassigning buttons With Buttons Preferences you can select which applications are associated with the quick buttons and the Side button on your Treo smartphone. You can assign a primary and secondary application to each of the three quick buttons that open an application. NOTE We recommend that you keep the primary button assignments on the factory settings until you become comfortable with the features of your smartphone. If you do change the primary button assignments, remember that the instructions in this guide and in the other help features refer to the original button settings. 1 Press Applications Prefs . and select 2 Select Buttons. 3 Select the pick list next to the button, Option + button, or Side button that you want to reassign, and then select an application. 184 4 Select Done. You can also choose an application to open with the sync button on the USB sync cable. To change this setting, select HotSync on the Buttons Preferences screen. DID YOU KNOW? To restore all the buttons and key combinations to their factory settings, select Default. TIP Some third-party applications automatically take over a button when you install the application. DID YOU KNOW? Changing default applications Sometimes one application looks for another application to handle information (for example, a mail application might open a browser when you select a link in an email message). Your smartphone comes with a set of predefined applications to handle email, messaging, and browser requests from other applications. If you have more than one application to handle these requests on your smartphone, you can specify which application you want to use for each function. 1 Press Applications Prefs . Locking your smartphone and info Your Treo smartphone includes several features to protect your smartphone from inadvertent use and keep your information private. You can lock any of the following features on your smartphone: • Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard and all buttons to prevent accidental presses in your bag or pocket. • Screen: You can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during an active call or call alert. • Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your phone to require a password to make calls. The built-in security software lets you make emergency calls even if your phone is locked. • Smartphone: You can set your smartphone to require a password for you to see any information on your smartphone. and select 2 Select Default Apps. 3 Select each pick list and select the application you want to associate with that function. 4 Select Done. 10 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 185 CHAPTER 10 YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS • Entries: You can mask or hide entries marked as private and set your smartphone to require a password for viewing them. Locking your keyboard (Keyguard) The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so that you don’t accidentally press buttons or activate items on the screen while your smartphone is in a pocket or bag. If you disabled Keyguard, you can turn Keyguard on manually by pressing Option + Power/End when the screen is on. TIP By default, Keyguard turns on whenever the screen is off. Each time you wake up the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to unlock the keyboard and use your smartphone. To turn off Keyguard, do the following: 1 When the screen is off, press Power/ End to wake up the screen. 2 Press Center to turn off Keyguard. You can change how quickly Keyguard turns on, or you can disable this feature altogether. To change the Keyguard settings, do the following: 1 Press Applications Prefs . and select 2 Select Keyguard. 3 Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and then do one of the following: • 186 Select how quickly you want Keyguard to turn on: When power is turned off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30 seconds after power off. • Select Disable to completely disable the Keyguard feature until you turn it on again. 4 Select Done. Locking your screen You can set your smartphone to automatically lock the screen’s touch-sensitive features in certain situations. 1 Press Applications Prefs . and select 2 Select Keyguard. 10 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 4 Select Done. When you check the boxes to disable the touchscreen during a call, the touchscreen is automatically enabled again after you end the call. DID YOU KNOW? Locking your phone (Phone Lock) You can lock your phone to prevent unauthorized calls and use of other wireless features. When your phone is locked, you must enter the correct code to unlock it. You can still place emergency calls when your phone is locked, however. 3 Check any of the following boxes: Incoming calls received: Disables the screen when the phone rings. You must use the 5-way to select the onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons, or press Send to answer the call or Power/End to ignore the call. On a call: Disables the screen after you answer a call. You must use the 5-way to select the onscreen buttons during the call. Use this setting to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while you’re holding your smartphone near your ear to speak. When Phone Lock is turned on, other people can still see the info on your smartphone, but they cannot make calls or use the other wireless features without your password. TIP 1 Press Phone . 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Options, and then select Phone Lock. 4 (Optional) Select Advanced, enter up to three numbers that you can dial when your phone is locked, and then 187 CHAPTER 10 YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS select OK. You do not need to enter the standard emergency call number for your area, such as 911, as one of the three numbers, because this number is always available. 5 Select one of the following Phone Lock options: On phone power off: Locks your phone each time you turn it off. When this setting is active, you must enter your lock code each time you turn your phone on again. Immediately: Locks your phone when you select OK. The next time you dial a number, you must enter your lock code to unlock your phone. After that, you can continue to make calls without entering your lock code, unless you select one of these Phone Lock options. 6 When prompted, enter the lock code, and then select OK. (Unless you changed your lock code, the lock code is the last four digits of your phone number.) 7 If you want to change the lock code, select Change Lock Code, enter a new 188 lock code, and then select OK. Repeat this step to verify the new lock code. 8 Select OK. If you selected Immediately in step 5, your phone locks right away. If you selected On phone power off, your phone locks the next time you press and hold Power/End to turn off your phone. If you want to lock your phone once in a while, use the Immediately option to lock your phone on demand. TIP To disable the current Phone Lock settings: 1 Press Menu . 2 Select Options, and then select Phone Lock. 3 Uncheck the On phone power off box. 4 Enter your lock code to change this setting. 5 Select OK twice. Locking your smartphone To protect your personal information, you can lock your smartphone, so that you need to enter your password to access any of your information or use any of the features on your smartphone, including the phone. You can, however, still make emergency calls when your smartphone is locked. 3 Assign a password and a password hint. 10 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 4 Select the Auto Lock Device box. 5 When prompted, enter your password and select OK. 6 Select one of the following options: IMPORTANT If you lock your smartphone, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If you forget the password, you need to perform a hard reset to resume using your smartphone. Performing a hard reset deletes all the entries in your smartphone. However, you can restore all previously synchronized info the next time you sync (see Synchronizing information— the basics). 1 Press Applications Security . Never: Prevents your smartphone from locking automatically. and select 2 Select the Password box. On power off: Locks your smartphone when you turn off the screen, or when it shuts off with the Auto-off feature. At a preset time: Locks your smartphone at a specific time of day. After a preset delay: Locks your smartphone after a period of inactivity. 7 Select OK. 189 CHAPTER 10 YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 8 Do one of the following: • Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your smartphone immediately. • Press Applications to accept your settings and continue using your smartphone. After you create a password, you can lock your system manually. Press Applications and select Security. Select Lock & Turn Off, and then select Off & Lock. 1 Display the entry that you want to mark private. To change your password, select the Password box, enter your current password, and then enter the new password. To delete your password, select the Password box and then select Unassign. 3 Check the Private box. TIP TIP Working with private entries In most applications you can mark individual entries as private. All private entries remain visible and accessible until you select the Security setting. You have two Security setting options: 190 After you enable the mask or hide setting, any entries marked as private are immediately hidden or masked. If you define a password, you must enter it to display private entries. If you do not define a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal private entries without a password. • Hide Records: Private entries do not appear anywhere in the application. • Mask Records: Private entries are replaced with a visual placeholder where the entry would normally appear. 2 Select Details. 4 Select OK. Hiding or masking all private entries Make sure the entries you want to mask or hide are marked private. 1 Press Applications Security . and select 2 Select the Current Privacy pick list and select either Hide Records or Mask Records. 3 If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK. Viewing all private records You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden or masked. 1 Press Applications Security . and select 2 Select the Current Privacy pick list and select Show Records. 3 If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK. You can also access the system-wide security settings while you’re in an application, such as Calendar. Press Menu, select Options, and then select Security. TIP ® Security and Palm Desktop software (Windows) The Windows version of Palm® Desktop software observes the security password for your Treo smartphone. If you forget your password, you cannot view your information in Palm Desktop. If your smartphone is unlocked, you can change your password on your smartphone, but all entries marked as private are deleted. You can restore your private entries the next time you sync. Follow these steps to recover from a lost password: 1 Press Applications Security . 10 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS and select 2 Select the Password box. 3 Select Lost Password. 4 Select Yes. If you want additional security for Palm Desktop files, you may want to purchase a third-party solution. TIP Entering owner information You can use Owner Preferences to record information that you want to associate with your Treo smartphone, such as your name, company name, and home phone number. If you lock your smartphone (see Locking your smartphone), the Owner Preferences information appears on the screen that requests your password to unlock it, and you must also enter your password to change the Owner Preferences information. 1 Press Applications Prefs . and select 2 Select Owner. 191 CHAPTER 10 YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 3 If you assigned a password with the Security application, select Unlock, enter your password, and then select OK to continue. 4 Enter the text that you want to appear in the Owner Preferences screen. date, time, and location setting for your Treo smartphone. 1 Press Applications Prefs . and select 2 Select Date & Time. 3 To manually set the date and time, uncheck the Get date & Time from mobile network box. Select the Date field and select the date, and then select the Time field and select the time. 5 Select Done. System settings Setting the date and time By default, your smartphone synchronizes the date, time, and time zone with the network when your phone is on and you are inside a coverage area. Date & Time Preferences enable you to manually set the 192 4 To manually set the time zone, uncheck the Get time zone from mobile network box. If you unchecked the date and time box in step 3, the time zone box is automatically unchecked. Select the Set Location pick list, and then select a city in your time zone. 3 Set any of the following preferences: If a city in the same time zone is not on the list, select Edit List, select Add, select a city in your time zone, and then select OK. If necessary, modify any of the settings in the Edit Location dialog box, and then select OK. TIP 10 CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS Brightness: Sets the intensity of the screen and keyboard backlights. Drag the slider or press Left and Right to adjust the brightness level. DID YOU KNOW? If you uncheck the date and time box, the time zone box is disabled and you cannot have the network automatically set the time zone. However, you can choose to have the network set the date and time, but manually set the time zone. 5 Select OK. 6 Select Done. You can also set time zones for Calendar events. See Creating an event. TIP Optimizing power settings Power Preferences enable you to adjust settings to maximize your smartphone’s battery performance. 1 Press Applications Prefs . 2 Select Power. and select Auto-off after: Determines how long your screen stays on during a period of inactivity. When there is no interaction with the keyboard or screen for the specified time period, your smartphone turns off automatically. On a call, dim backlight after: Determines how long the backlight stays on at normal intensity during a phone call. After the specified time period, the backlight dims to conserve power during a long phone call. 193 CHAPTER 10 YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS Beam Receive: Determines whether your Treo smartphone is ready to receive information over an infrared beam. If you leave this option turned off, you must return to this screen to turn on this option the next time you want to receive a beam. 4 Select Done. You can also access the brightness setting by pressing Option + P. To temporarily dim the screen’s brightness, press Option + Menu. TIP server through the company’s firewall (security layer). You need a VPN client on your smartphone if your smartphone and your company’s server are located on opposite sides of the firewall. Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the corporate server. If a VPN is necessary, you must purchase and install a third-party VPN client on your smartphone to use this feature. For information about third-party VPN client software, see the Palm Software Installation CD or visit www.palm.com/ treo700pcdma-mytreo. TIP Connection settings Connecting to a virtual private network If you want to use your Treo smartphone to access your corporate email account or other files on your corporate server, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your smartphone. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate 194 1 Install your third-party VPN client. See Installing applications for details. 2 Press Applications Prefs . and select 3 Select VPN. 4 Enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator. CHAPT ER 11 Common questions Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have, this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions. For additional information and answers to other common questions, visit www.palm.com/ treo700pcdma-support. In this chapter Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Desktop software installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Making room on your Treo smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Upgrading If you experience problems with your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone after performing the upgrade steps in this guide, you may have incompatible applications or settings that were not quarantined during the installation process. These incompatible applications or settings can lead to numerous issues, including system resets and freezes. If you experience a problem after upgrading, follow the steps in this section to remove the incompatible apps from your smartphone and to transfer your other info to your new smartphone. NOTE If you have trouble installing a third-party application, contact the developer for assistance. We recommend that you do not install apps that do any of the following: • Modify phone functions, such as ringtones, dialing, or caller ID • Replace organizer features, such as Contacts or Calendar • Set data connection features, such as activating or ending data connections • Provide web clipping features, such as PQA files • Provide instant messaging features 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS If you want to continue using these types of applications, please contact the third-party developer for software updates and info about compatibility with your Treo 700P smartphone. WINDOWS ONLY 1 On your computer, click Start>Programs>Palm>Safe HotSync. 2 Follow the instructions on the screen. 3 Locate the Old_Apps folder on your computer. This folder is usually located inside one of the following folders: C:\Program Files\Palm\ C:\Program Files\palmOne\ C:\Program Files\Handspring\ 4 To help you identify the app that is causing the problem, move one app at a time from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup folder, and then sync. 197 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS If the problem recurs, delete the last app you installed and report the problem to its developer. 5 Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in the Old_Apps folder. NOTE If you have trouble moving apps from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup folder, or determining which files to move, try reinstalling the app using the original third-party developer files. Need more info on the Backup folder? See What is the backup folder?. TIP MAC ONLY 1 Locate your user folder on your computer. NOTE Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found in this location: : Users : : Documents : Palm : Users 2 Select your user folder and Option-drag it to your Mac desktop to make a copy of that folder. 198 3 Confirm that your copy includes the Backup subfolder and that all the files in the original Backup subfolder are also in the copy of the Backup subfolder. 4 Delete all files from the original Backup subfolder. 5 Perform a hard reset on your Treo 700P smartphone. See Resetting your smartphone for instructions. 6 Sync your new smartphone with your new desktop software and be sure to select your existing device name from the User list. 7 To help you identify the app that is causing the problem, move one third-party app from the copy of the Backup subfolder to the original Backup subfolder, and then sync. If the problem recurs, delete the last app you installed and report the problem to its developer. 8 Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party apps in the copy of the Backup folder. Desktop software installation If you are having trouble installing the desktop software, you may have the wrong version of the software or some of your computer’s resources may be unavailable. The Palm Software Installation CD installs software that lets you synchronize using Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows. If you want to synchronize using a different personal information manager (PIM), you must install a third-party solution. Contact the PIM’s author or vendor to learn if software is available for your new Treo smartphone. TIP 3 Quit any active applications, including virus scanners and Internet security applications. 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS 4 Make sure you’re installing the software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your new smartphone. Other versions of the desktop software may not work with this Treo smartphone. 5 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD to restart the installation. IMPORTANT Always use the same language for your Treo smartphone, your operating system, and your desktop software. Otherwise, you may lose information or have difficulty with synchronization. Support is not provided for mismatched language setups. Follow these steps to retry the installation: 1 Make sure your computer profile includes administrator rights to install software. In large organizations, these are usually granted by the system administrator. 2 Restart your computer. Resetting your smartphone Performing a soft reset A soft reset is similar to restarting a computer. If your smartphone is not 199 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS responding or you have trouble synchronizing with your computer, a soft reset may help. All your info is retained when you perform a soft reset. 1 Press the battery door release, and slide the battery door downward to remove it from your smartphone. 2 Use the stylus tip to gently press the reset button on the back of your smartphone. Performing a system reset A system reset, also called a safe or warm reset, tells your smartphone to stop what it’s doing and start over again without loading any system extras. If your smartphone loops or freezes during or after a soft reset, a system reset may help. Performing a system reset releases you from an endless loop so that you can uninstall a third-party application that may be causing the looping. 1 Press the battery door release, and slide the battery door downward 200 to remove it from your Treo smartphone. 2 While pressing and holding Up , use the tip of the stylus to gently press the reset button on the back of your device. 3 When the logo screen appears, release Up . 4 Delete the third-party application that you suspect is causing the problem. 5 Perform a soft reset. The wireless features of your smartphone are not available until you complete this step. Performing a hard reset related to software you installed. See Third-party applications for suggestions on diagnosing third-party software issues. 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS Some third-party applications do not create a backup on your computer when you synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you may lose data in these applications and you will need to reinstall the application after the hard reset. Please contact the application’s developer to find out which data is backed up during synchronization. TIP 1 Press the battery door release, and slide the battery door downward to remove it from your smartphone. A hard reset erases all information and third-party software on your Treo smartphone. Never perform a hard reset without first trying a soft reset and a system reset. You can restore previously synchronized information the next time you sync. 2 While pressing and holding Power/End , use the tip of the stylus to gently press the reset button on the back of your smartphone. A hard reset may tell you whether a problem stems from your smartphone or from an application installed on it. If you do not experience the problem after you perform a hard reset, the problem is 4 When the Erase all data? prompt appears, press Up to confirm the hard reset. 3 Continue pressing and holding Power/ End . When the logo screen appears, release Power/End . 201 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS If you do not see the Erase all data? message, the hard reset was not performed. Retry these steps, making sure to hold Power/End until the logo screen appears. TIP 5 If a language selection screen appears, select the same language you selected for your desktop software. IMPORTANT Always use the same language for your Treo smartphone, your operating system, and your desktop software. Otherwise, you may lose information or have difficulty with synchronization. Support is not provided for mismatched language setups. 6 Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen and set the date and time. Replacing the battery Your Treo 700P smartphone comes with a replaceable battery. Be sure to use a replacement battery that is recommended or sold by Palm and is compatible with the 202 Treo 700P smartphone. Failure to use the proper battery may result in a risk of personal injury or product damage, and it voids your smartphone warranty. 1 Press Power/End screen. to turn off the 2 Press the battery door release, and slide the battery door downward to remove it from your smartphone. 3 Place a finger in the notch next to the battery, and lift up the old battery at a 45-degree angle to remove it from the compartment. Battery door release Battery contacts Smartphone contacts Be sure to dispose of your old battery properly. In some areas, disposal in household or business trash is prohibited. TIP 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS Screen The screen appears blank Notch 4 Align the metal contacts on the new battery with the contacts inside the battery compartment. 5 Insert the new battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, pressing it into place. Slide the battery door onto the back of the smartphone until it clicks into place. 6 Connect your smartphone to the charger or sync cable. 7 Wait for your Treo smartphone to turn on, and then enable the network time or set the date and time when prompted. 1 When a call lasts longer than the limit specified in Power Preferences, the screen dims automatically. In certain lighting conditions, the screen may appear blank when this occurs. Press any key except Power/End to restore the screen to normal brightness. Pressing Power/End hangs up the call. 2 When a period of inactivity lasts longer than the limit specified in Power Preferences, the screen turns off. Press and release Power/End to wake up the screen. 3 Look closely at the screen. If you can see a dim image, try adjusting the screen brightness (see Adjusting the brightness). 4 If the screen is still blank, perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). 203 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS 5 If the problem persists, connect your smartphone to the charger (see Charging the battery) and perform a soft reset again. 6 If that doesn’t work, perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard reset). To find carrying cases that protect the screen and other useful accessories, visit www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo. TIP The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of the screen is the Alert screen symbol. It appears when you have alarms or messages that you haven’t acknowledged. 1 Press and hold Center or tap the blinking bell with your stylus. 2 When the list of pending alerts appears, do any of the following: The screen doesn’t respond accurately to taps or it activates wrong features • Select the alert text to view the item and keep it in the list. 1 Press Applications and use the 5-way to select Prefs . • Check the box next to an alert to clear it from the list, and then select Done. 2 Use the 5-way Touchscreen. to select 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen. 4 Select Done. 5 If the problem persists, check for dirt between the screen and the edge of the smartphone. 6 If you’re using a screen protector, make sure that it is properly installed. 204 There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left corner Synchronization Synchronization backs up the information from your smartphone onto your computer and vice versa. If you ever need to perform a hard reset or otherwise need to erase all your information on your smartphone, you can synchronize your smartphone with your computer to restore the info. Similarly, if your computer crashes and your Palm Desktop info is damaged, you can recover your info by synchronizing with your smartphone. To make sure you always have an up-to-date backup of your info, synchronize frequently. This section describes synchronization between your Treo smartphone and a desktop computer running Palm Desktop software. You can also synchronize the information on your smartphone using third-party applications. See the separate documentation for the third-party application for information on features and configuration. Before you attempt to synchronize, make sure you’ve installed the desktop synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation CD. Every device needs a unique name. Never synchronize more than one device to the same device name on your computer. TIP I can’t find my user folder WINDOWS ONLY If your device name is one word, your user folder name is the first six characters of your device name. If your device name is two words, your user folder name consists of the first six characters of the second word of your device name followed by the first letter of the first word. For example, if your device name is John Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ. Your user folder is usually located inside one of the following folders: C:\Program Files\Palm\ C:\Program Files\palmOne\ C:\Program Files\Handspring\ 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS MAC ONLY Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found in this location: Mac hard drive : Users : Your Mac username : Documents : Palm : Users. What is the backup folder? The Backup folder is located inside your user folder (see I can’t find my user folder). During synchronization, HotSync® manager puts a copy of most of your info and applications in the Backup folder. (Some third-party apps do not put a copy in the Backup folder.) The next time you sync, HotSync manager compares the contents of the Backup folder to the contents of your smartphone, and then restores any missing info or applications. 205 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS If an app that you deleted reappears on your smartphone, try deleting the app from your Backup folder. Programs, select Palm, and then select HotSync Manager. Palm Desktop does not respond to a sync attempt 1 Make sure that the USB sync cable is securely connected to the USB port on your computer and on the bottom of your smartphone (see Synchronizing information—the basics). If you’re having trouble trying to sync using an IR or Bluetooth connection, try using the USB sync cable instead. If this solves the problem, then check your IR or Bluetooth settings (see Synchronizing information— advanced). TIP 2 Make sure that HotSync manager is running: Windows: Right-click HotSync manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and make sure that Local USB is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync manager icon, click Start, select 206 Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac hard drive. Double-click HotSync manager in the Palm folder. In the Connection Settings panel, set the Local Setup port to Palm USB. 3 Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the remaining steps. 4 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). 5 Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the remaining steps. 6 If problems persist and you’re synchronizing through a USB hub, try connecting the sync cable to a different USB port or directly to your computer’s built-in USB port. 7 Reboot your computer. 8 Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the remaining steps. 9 Do one of the following: Windows: Uninstall Palm software. Click Start, select Settings, select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop software, and then click Change/ Remove. Mac: Contact Technical Support if the problem persists after completing step 7. Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software. 10 Reboot your computer. 11 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone. Synchronization starts but stops without finishing 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS The HotSync Log can give you information about your most recent synchronization. TIP Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and then select View Log. Mac: Open Palm Desktop software. From the HotSync menu, select View Log. If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS® device or received a system error, such as Sys0505, there may be conflicts with software on your smartphone. 1 Locate your Backup subfolder and rename the folder (for example, BackupOld). Note that “Palm” in the following locations might be “Handspring” or “palmOne,” based on the device you’re upgrading from: Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\device name Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\ device name 207 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS 2 Synchronize. 3 If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a time by double-clicking a single file in the original Backup subfolder that you renamed, and sync after each application you install. If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report the problem to its developer. 4 Do one of the following: Windows: If the Windows New Hardware Wizard appears, the synchronization process may be timing out before the wizard completes its job. Follow all instructions in the New Hardware Wizard, and then sync again. Mac: Contact Technical Support if the problem persists after completing step 3. Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software. 5 (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings, select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select 208 Palm Desktop software, and then click Change/Remove. 6 Reboot your computer. 7 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone. Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t appear where it should 1 Make sure you’re synchronizing with the intended desktop personal information manager (PIM). The Palm Software Installation CD enables you to choose whether you want to synchronize with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows. Reinsert the installation CD and select Change your synchronization method if necessary. If you use a different PIM, you need to install third-party software to synchronize. For more info, consult the company that makes the PIM. 2 If multiple Palm OS devices are synchronizing with your computer, make sure you are synchronizing with the correct device name. If info is not appearing in Palm Desktop software, make sure the correct device name is selected in the User list on the toolbar of Palm Desktop software. 3 Open HotSync manager on your computer, and make sure the necessary conduits are set to Synchronize the files. 4 Do one of the following: Windows: Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings, select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop software, and then click Change/Remove. Mac: Contact Technical Support if the problem persists after completing step 3. Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software. 5 Reboot your computer. 6 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone. 7 (Outlook only) If you’re trying to synchronize offline, set your Outlook Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to be available offline. Outlook subfolders and public folders are not accessible with the included software. You may wish to use a third-party solution instead. TIP 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS (Outlook only) If you want to sync your info with a global Exchange Address Book, you must copy the addresses to your local Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the addresses and select Add to Personal Address Book). TIP For more info on Outlook conduits, right-click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar, select Custom, select an app with Outlook in its name, and then select Help. TIP I have duplicate entries in Microsoft Outlook after I sync 1 Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the duplicate entries. 2 On your computer, go to the Outlook application with duplicate entries and manually enter any info you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized. 3 Right-click HotSync manager taskbar, and select Custom. in the 209 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS 4 Select the application that has duplicate entries and also has Outlook in its name, such as Outlook contacts. 5 Click Change. 6 Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK. 7 If more than one Outlook application has duplicate entries, then repeat steps 4 through 6 for each application with duplicates. 8 Click Done. 9 Synchronize your smartphone and your computer. 210 with your Treo 700P smartphone. If you’re not sure whether this software is installed, reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone. 2 Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the wrong entries. 3 On your computer, manually enter any Calendar info you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized. 4 Click HotSync manager in the taskbar and select Custom. My appointments show up in the wrong time slot after I sync 5 Select an application that has both Calendar and Outlook in its name. If you create an appointment in the wrong time zone (i.e., your desktop was set to the wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong time zone on your smartphone. To be safe, enable local network time and avoid assigning time zones to your appointments. 6 Click Change. 7 Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK. 8 Synchronize your smartphone and your computer. If you’re using Microsoft Outlook: 9 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog box. 1 Make sure that you installed the Microsoft Outlook conduit that came 10 Select Synchronize the files, and then click OK. You should now be able to assign time zones to your events without encountering this problem. 12 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog box. If you’re using Palm Desktop software: 13 Select Synchronize the files, and then click OK. 1 On your smartphone, press Calendar . 2 Press Menu . 3 Select Options, and then select Preferences. 4 Uncheck the New events use time zones box (if it’s checked). 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS You should now be able to assign time zones to your events without encountering this problem. IMPORTANT To avoid this problem in the future, do not assign time zones to your events. Palm Desktop software does not support time zones. 5 On your computer, open Palm Desktop software and correct the wrong entries. 6 On your computer, manually enter any Calendar info you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized. 7 Click HotSync manager in the taskbar and select Custom. 8 Select Calendar. 9 Click Change. 10 Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK. 11 Synchronize your smartphone and your computer. Phone Signal strength is weak Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live, commute, work, and play. Then you will know when to expect signal strength issues. You can check signal strength by looking at the Signal Strength icon in the title bar of the Main View in the Phone application. The stronger the signal, the more bars that appear. If you are outside a coverage area, no bars appear. 211 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS This applies to both the speakerphone and the earpiece. 1 If you’re standing, move about ten feet in any direction. 2 If you’re in a building, move near a window. Open any metal blinds. • Position the earpiece closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking back to the microphone. Keep your hand away from the microphone hole, which is on the bottom right side of the smartphone. • If you’re using the speakerphone feature with your smartphone lying on a flat surface, try turning the smartphone face down (screen facing the surface). 3 If you’re in a building, move outdoors or to a more open area. 4 If you’re outdoors, move away from large buildings, trees, or electrical wires. 5 If you’re in a vehicle, move your Treo smartphone so that it’s level with a window of your vehicle. My smartphone won’t connect to the mobile network 1 Try the suggestions about signal strength described in Signal strength is weak. 2 Turn off your phone and turn it on again (see Turning your phone on and off). I hear my own voice echo Ask the person on the other end of the call to turn down the volume on his or her phone or to hold the phone closer to his or her ear. My voice is too quiet on the other end • Be sure to place the bottom of the Treo smartphone, or the hands-free microphone, close to your mouth. • Check the Signal Strength icon in the title bar of the Main View in the Phone Application. If the signal is weak (few bars are displayed), try the suggestions about signal strength described in Signal strength is weak. 3 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). The other person hears an echo • 212 Try decreasing the volume on your Treo smartphone to avoid coupling or feedback on the other person’s end. I hear static or interference Check the Signal Strength icon in the title bar of the Main View in the Phone Application. If the signal is weak (few bars are displayed), try the suggestions about signal strength described in Signal strength is weak. cheek. Try holding the smartphone so that your face doesn’t press against the screen. If this is not convenient, you may want to disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during active calls (see Locking your screen). 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS My phone seems to turn off by itself If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free device, try the following: • Move your smartphone closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality degrades as the distance between your smartphone and hands-free device increases. The effective range for a device varies between manufacturers. • Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the smartphone and your hands-free device. For best performance, keep your Bluetooth headset and phone on the same side of your body. TIP My smartphone hangs up when I hold it to my ear You may be accidentally pressing the onscreen Hang Up All button with your If a system error and reset occur, the Treo smartphone automatically turns the phone on if it was on before the reset. However, if the smartphone can’t determine if your phone was on before the reset, the phone does not automatically turn on (see Turning your phone on and off). If the problem persists and you’re using third-party applications, see Third-party applications for additional suggestions. My smartphone makes or answers calls when it’s in a bag or pocket Items in your bag or pocket may be pressing the onscreen Answer button or otherwise activating screen items. If this happens, be sure to press Power/End to turn off the screen before placing your smartphone in a bag or pocket. You may also want to disable the screen’s 213 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS touch-sensitive feature during incoming calls (see Locking your screen). Hands-free devices Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10 meters) in optimum environmental conditions. Performance and range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors. To find carrying cases that can help prevent your smartphone from making calls, as well as other useful accessories, visit www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo. TIP TIP The voicemail icon stays on the screen after I listen to my messages If the voicemail icon stays in the title bar after you listen to your messages, you can manually clear the voicemail icon. 1 In the Phone application, press Menu . I can’t make or receive calls using a Bluetooth hands-free device Confirm all the following: • The Bluetooth device is compatible with your smartphone. Go to http:// www.palm.com/us/support/bluetooth/ treo700p_bluetooth_compatibility.html www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-support for a list of compatible devices. • Press Applications and select Bluetooth . Make sure the Bluetooth setting is On. • You have already formed a partnership between your smartphone and your hands-free device, and that the hands-free device appears in the Trusted Devices list. (see Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device). 2 Select Options and then select Phone Preferences. 3 Select Clear Voicemail Icon. 214 • Your hands-free device is charged and turned on. • Your Treo smartphone is within range of the hands-free device. If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it On again. If it still persists, create a new partnership with the hands-free device (see Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device). For best performance, keep your Bluetooth headset and phone on the same side of your body. TIP Some features of my Bluetooth hands-free device don’t work with my smartphone • Check the Palm compatibility list at http://www.palm.com/us/support/ bluetooth/ treo700p_bluetooth_compatibility.html www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-support to ensure that your device is compatible. • Check the documentation that came with your device or the manufacturer’s website for information specific to your device. I hear static or interference when using my Bluetooth hands-free device • Try moving your Treo smartphone closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality degrades as the distance between your smartphone and hands-free device increases. The effective range for a device varies between manufacturers. • Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the smartphone and your hands-free device. • If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it back On again. If it still persists, create a new partnership with the hands-free device (see Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device). 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS Email For troubleshooting info on the VersaMail® application, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD. 215 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS Messaging Web I can’t send or receive text messages I can’t tell if data services are available • Make sure your phone is turned on (see Turning your phone on and off). • Contact your wireless service provider to verify that your plan includes text messaging services, that these services have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your location. your wireless service provider should be able to tell you if messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays. Delays can also occur between the time that a message is sent and the time it is received. • Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle text messages. • If a text message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main View of the Phone application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data connection is active. See What are all those icons? for a description of the icons that indicate that data services are available. If your phone is on and you do not see any of the data icons, then data services are not available in your current location. TIP My smartphone won’t connect to the Internet Your Treo 700P smartphone supports the 1XRTT and EVDO wireless data networks. To connect to the Internet, you must subscribe to and activate data services with your wireless service provider, and you must be in a location with data coverage. 1 Press and hold Power/End turn off your phone. Then press 216 to and hold the same button to turn it back on again. • Data services have been activated on your account 2 Press Phone and look for either the 1XRTT or EVDO icon in the title bar of the Main View. • Data coverage is available in your location • There are no data service outages in your location 3 If you see one of these icons, you are in a data coverage area. Try connecting to the Internet again. If you do not see either of these icons, press Applications , select Prefs , and continue with the following steps. 4 Select Network. 5 Select the Services pick list and select EVDO. 6 Select Connect. 7 If the connection is successful, go the web browser. If you still can’t make a connection, perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). 8 If your phone did not turn on automatically, press and hold Power/ End to turn on your phone, and try connecting to the Internet. 9 Contact your wireless service provider to verify the following: • Your subscription plan includes high-speed data services 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS I can’t access a web page First, make sure you have Internet access: Open the web browser and try to view another web page you’ve loaded before. To ensure you’re viewing the page directly from the Internet, press Menu , select Go, and then select Refresh. If you can view the other web page after you refresh it, but you still can’t access the page you were originally trying to view, the page may contain elements that are not supported by the web browser. These include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript, WMLScript, and other plug-ins. Some websites use a redirector to their true home page. If the web browser on your smartphone can’t follow the redirector, try using a desktop browser to see the landing page of the redirector, and 217 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS then enter that address in the web browser on your smartphone. Your Treo smartphone can open your email application when you select an email address on a web page. If nothing happens when you select the link, make sure your email application is already set up. TIP It takes a long time for a web page to load If it is taking longer than usual to load web pages, you may have traveled from an EVDO service area to a 1XRTT service area. Although 1XRTT data service is considered a high-speed data service, it seems slow if you are used to EVDO speed. 1 Press Phone and look for either the 1XRTT or EVDO icon in the title bar of the Main View of the Phone application. 2 If you see the EVDO icon, then there may be a problem with the web site you are trying to access. Try opening a different web page to see if the problem persists. 218 3 If you see the 1XRTT icon, then you may be experiencing the difference in performance between the two types of data networks. 4 To be sure there is not a problem with your connection to your wireless service provider’s network, press and hold Power/End to turn off your phone. Then press and hold the same button to turn it back on again. 5 Try opening the web page again to see if it loads faster. An image or map is too small on my screen The web browser has two modes: Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized Mode resizes all images and page elements to fit in a single column on the smartphone screen. Switch to Wide Page Mode to see the full-size image (see Viewing a web page). You may also be able to save the image on your smartphone or an expansion card and then view the image later on your computer. A secure site refuses to permit a transaction Some websites don’t support certain browsers for transactions. Please contact the site’s webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions using your smartphone’s Blazer® web browser. Camera • For best results, verify that you have the brightest light source coming from behind you, lighting the subject’s face. Avoid taking indoor pictures with the subject in front of a window or light. • Make sure the subject is at least 18 inches away from the camera to ensure good focus. 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS When you synchronize your smartphone with your computer, your camera images are stored on your hard drive (see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer). Here are some tips for taking good pictures with the built-in camera: • Clean the camera’s lens with a soft, lint-free cloth. • Take pictures in bright lighting conditions. Low-light images may be grainy, due to the sensitivity of the camera. • Hold the smartphone as still as possible. Try supporting your picture-taking arm against your body or a stationary object (such as a wall). • Keep the subject of the picture still. Exposure time is longer with lower light levels, so you may see a blur. Making room on your Treo smartphone Keep in mind that your smartphone includes an expansion card slot, and that you can store applications and information on expansion cards (sold separately). However, you still need free memory on the smartphone itself to run applications from an expansion card. For more info on using expansion cards, see Using expansion cards. 219 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS If you store a large number of records or install many third-party applications, the internal memory on your smartphone may fill up. Here are some common ways to clear space: • • • Email: Messages that have large attachments can quickly consume memory on your smartphone. Delete messages with large attachments. If you have hundreds of messages with or without attachments, you may want to delete older messages to make room (see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD.) Pics&Videos: Large images take up a lot of memory. Move images to an expansion card or synchronize them to your computer, and then delete the images from your smartphone (see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer and Deleting a picture or video). Music: Music files often consume excessive memory. Move music files to an expansion card, or delete large files from your smartphone (see Transferring MP3 files from your computer). 220 • Internet: If you set a large web browser cache, you may want to use the web browser’s advanced Memory Management settings to clear all recent pages (see Customizing your web browser settings). • Third-party applications: You can delete infrequently used applications (see Removing applications) or move them to an expansion card (see Copying applications between an expansion card and your smartphone). Third-party applications Some third-party applications can cause conflicts on your smartphone. For example, third-party applications that were not written with the Treo smartphone keyboard and 5-way navigator in mind may cause strange behavior or errors when using the keyboard and 5-way navigator in these applications. Third-party applications that modify wireless features may require extra troubleshooting. If you recently installed an application and your device seems to be stuck, try the following: WINDOWS ONLY C:\Program Files\Palm\device name 1 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). HD\Applications\Palm\Users\device name 2 If the problem persists, perform a system reset (see Performing a system reset). 7 Perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard reset). 3 Delete the most recently installed application from your smartphone (see Removing applications). 4 If the problem persists, perform another system reset. 5 If possible, synchronize your smartphone with your computer to back up your most recent info. 6 If you’re unable to perform the preceding steps or the problem persists, locate your Backup subfolder on your computer and rename the folder (for example, BackupOld). Note that “Palm” in the following locations might be “Handspring” or “palmOne,” based on the device you’re upgrading from: 11 CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS MAC ONLY Mac 8 Sync to restore your Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Memos, and Pics&Videos info. 9 If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a time by double-clicking a single file in the original Backup subfolder that you renamed, and sync after each application you install. 10 If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report the problem to its developer. Getting more help Contact the author or vendor of the third-party software if you require further assistance. 221 CHAPTER 11 COMMON QUESTIONS Error messages Your Treo smartphone is designed to minimize interruptions when a system error occurs. If your smartphone encounters a system error, it automatically resets itself and resumes functioning as normal. If possible, it even turns the phone back on if it was on before the error occurred. Sometimes you might want to know more about an error. Your Treo smartphone uses a special interface to show error messages in greater detail. 222 1 Press Phone . 2 Enter #*#377, and then press Send . 3 Review the screen with details about the conditions that led up to the most recent automatic reset. 4 Select OK. Note that third-party developers create their own error messages. If you do not understand an error message, please contact the developer of the application for help. Where to learn more For a quick introduction Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you to many of your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone’s features. It is already installed on your smartphone, and you can open it any time. Press Applications , and then select Quick Tour . While using your Treo smartphone On-device User Guide: A copy of this guide is available right on your smartphone. The on-device guide is specially formatted for your smartphone screen. To view the on-device guide, press Applications , and then select My Treo . Tips: Many of the built-in applications include helpful tips for getting the most out of your smartphone. To view these tips, open an application, press Menu , select Options, and then select Tips. Online support from Palm: For up-to-date downloads, troubleshooting, and support information, go to www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-support. If you need more information Books: Many books on Palm OS® devices are available in local or online book retailers (look in the computers section), or visit www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo. Online forums: Consult online Treo device user discussion groups to swap information and learn about topics you may find nowhere else. for details, visit www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo. Customer service from your wireless service provider: For questions about your mobile account or features, contact your wireless service provider’s technical support department or your wireless service provider’s customer service and billing department. Information: Many screens have a Tips icon in the upper-right corner. Select the Tips icon to learn about the tasks you can perform in that dialog box. WHERE TO LEARN MORE 223 224 WHERE TO LEARN MORE Terms 1xRTT (single carrier [1x] radio transmission technology) A wireless technology that provides fast data transfer and Internet access with average speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts of up to 144Kbps. Alt (alternative) A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the keyboard, and then press Alt to access variations such as international characters and symbols. Beam The process of sending or receiving an entry or application using the infrared port on your Treo smartphone. Bluetooth® wireless technology Technology that enables devices such as smartphones, mobile phones, and computers to connect wirelessly to each other so that they can exchange information over short distances. Device name The screen on your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone from which you can open all applications. The name associated with your Treo smartphone that distinguishes it from other Palm OS® devices. When you first synchronize your smartphone, you are asked to give it a device name. This name appears in the User list in Palm Desktop software. Auto-off interval Dialog box The time of inactivity that passes before the screen on your smartphone turns off. The wireless features on your smartphone are unaffected by this setting. A set of options and command buttons that is enclosed by a border and that enables you to carry out a specific task. Applications EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized) A wireless broadband technology that is designed for very high speed data transfer with average download speeds of 400 to TERMS 225 700Kbps. It is capable of reaching download speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and upload speeds of up to 156Kbps. Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) Favorite Option key A button that provides quick access to a phone number (speed dial) or commonly used application (such as Contacts, Web, Messaging). You can define up to 70 favorite buttons in the Phone application. The keyboard button that enables you to access the alternative feature that appears above the letter on each key. HotSync® The technology that synchronizes your smartphone and your computer with the simple press of a button. HotSync manager The computer application that manages the synchronization of your Treo smartphone with your computer. Infrared (IR) A way of transmitting information using light waves. The IR port on your Treo smartphone enables you to transfer information to other IR devices within a short radius. 226 TERMS The rechargeable battery technology used in Treo smartphones. Palm® Desktop software A PIM application for computers that helps you manage your personal information and keep your personal information synchronized with your Treo smartphone. Palm OS® The operating system of your Treo 700P smartphone. Palm OS is known for its simplicity of use and for the large number of compatible third-party applications that can be added to your Treo 700P smartphone. Palm® Quick Install The component on your Windows computer that enables you to install Palm OS applications and other information on your Treo smartphone. Partnership Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your smartphone and a hands-free device—that can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. Once you form a partnership with a device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that device. Partnership is also known as paired relationship, pairing, Trusted Device, and Trusted Pair on some devices. Phone The application on your Treo smartphone that enables you to make and receive phone calls. are typically exchanged between mobile phones. These messages can usually include up to 160 characters; messages with more than 160 characters are automatically split into several messages. Treo smartphones can send and receive SMS messages while you are on a voice call. Streaming Technology that enables you to access media content—for example, watch video or listen to an audio program—directly from the Internet on your smartphone without needing to download a file to save on your smartphone. PIM (personal information manager) A genre of software that includes applications such as Palm Desktop software, Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes, and ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts, schedules, tasks, and memos. User folder The folder on your computer that contains the information you enter in Palm Desktop software and the information you enter on your smartphone and synchronize with Palm Desktop software. SMS (Short Messaging Service) The service that exchanges short text messages almost instantly. Text messages TERMS 227 228 TERMS Important safety and legal information FCC Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. FCC RF Safety Statement In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories. • A Palm™ brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product. • An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body and the unit. Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits See www.fcc.gov/oet/ rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety. Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless Smartphones The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a user of a wireless handset. The SAR value of a smartphone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how much RF the smartphone emits. All smartphone models are tested at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the SAR of a smartphone can be substantially less than the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its proximity to a base station antenna, smartphone design and other factors. What is important to remember is that each smartphone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs do not represent a variation in safety. All smartphones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values between different model smartphones do not mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public. The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone, by Palm are: Maximum SAR Values EVDO Cellular EVDO PCS Held to Ear 1.48 (W/Kg) 1.13 (W/Kg) Body - Worn 0.896 (W/Kg) 0.589 (W/Kg) IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION 229 FCC Radiofrequency Emission This smartphone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as. FCC ID number: O8FJIMI. More information on the smartphone's SAR can be found from the following FCC Website: https://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/prod/oet/cf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm. (The following information comes from a consumer information Website jointly sponsored by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC), entitled “Cell Smartphone Facts: Consumer Information on Wireless Smartphones.” The information reproduced herein is dated July 29, 2003. For further updates, please visit the Website: http://www.fda.gov/cellphones/qa.html.) What is radiofrequency energy (RF)? Radiofrequency energy (RF) is another name for radio waves. It is one form of electromagnetic energy that makes up the electromagnetic spectrum. Some of the other forms of energy in the electromagnetic spectrum are gamma rays, x-rays and light. Electromagnetic energy (or electromagnetic radiation) consists of waves of electric and magnetic energy moving together (radiating) through space. The area where these waves are found is called an electromagnetic field. Radio waves are created due to the movement of electrical charges in antennas. As they are created, these waves radiate away from the antenna. All electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light. The major differences between the different types of waves are the distances covered by one cycle of the wave and the number of waves that pass a certain point during a set time period. The wavelength is the distance covered by one cycle of a wave. The frequency is the number of waves passing a given point in one second. For any electromagnetic wave, the wavelength multiplied by the frequency equals the speed of light. The frequency of an RF signal is usually expressed in units called hertz (Hz). One Hz equals one wave per second. One kilohertz (kHz) equals one thousand waves per second, one megahertz (MHz) equals one million waves per second, and one gigahertz (GHz) equals one billion waves per second. 230 IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION RF energy includes waves with frequencies ranging from about 3000 waves per second (3 kHz) to 300 billion waves per second (300 GHz). Microwaves are a subset of radio waves that have frequencies ranging from around 300 million waves per second (300 MHz) to three billion waves per second (3 GHz). How is radiofrequency energy used? Probably the most important use of RF energy is for telecommunications. Radio and TV broadcasting, wireless smartphones, pagers, cordless smartphones, police and fire department radios, point-to-point links and satellite communications all rely on RF energy. Other uses of RF energy include microwave ovens, radar, industrial heaters and sealers, and medical treatments. RF energy, especially at microwave frequencies, can heat water. Since most food has a high water content, microwaves can cook food quickly. Radar relies on RF energy to track cars and airplanes as well as for military applications. Industrial heaters and sealers use RF energy to mold plastic materials, glue wood products, seal leather items such as shoes and pocketbooks, and process food. Medical uses of RF energy include pacemaker monitoring and programming. How is radiofrequency radiation measured? RF waves and RF fields have both electrical and magnetic components. It is often convenient to express the strength of the RF field in terms of each component. For example, the unit “volts per meter” (V/m) is used to measure the electric field strength, and the unit “amperes per meter” (A/m) is used to express the magnetic field strength. Another common way to characterize an RF field is by means of the power density. Power density is defined as power per unit area. For example, power density can be expressed in terms of milliwatts (one thousandth of a watt) per square centimeter (mW/cm2) or microwatts (one millionth of a watt) per square centimeter (µW/cm2). The quantity used to measure how much RF energy is actually absorbed by the body is called the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy. It is usually expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg) or milliwatts per gram (mW/g). What biological effects can be caused by RF energy? The biological effects of radiofrequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy. Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material. Ionization only occurs with very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as X-rays and gamma rays. Often the term radiation is used when discussing ionizing radiation (such as that associated with nuclear power plants). The FCC guidelines for human exposure to RF electromagnetic fields are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations, the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy. The energy levels associated with radiofrequency energy, including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause the ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat) and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies. Many countries in Europe and elsewhere use exposure guidelines developed by the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). The ICNIRP safety limits are generally similar to those of the NCRP and IEEE, with a few exceptions. For example, ICNIRP recommends different exposure levels in the lower and upper frequency ranges and for localized exposure from certain products such as hand-held wireless telephones. Currently, the World Health Organization is working to provide a framework for international harmonization of RF safety standards. Large amounts of RF energy can heat tissue. This can damage tissues and increase body temperatures. Two areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat. The amount of RF radiation routinely encountered by the general public is too low to produce significant heating or increased body temperature. Still, some people have questions about the possible health effects of low levels of RF energy. It is generally agreed that further research is needed to determine what effects actually occur and whether they are dangerous to people. In the meantime, standards-setting organizations and government agencies are continuing to monitor the latest scientific findings to determine whether changes in safety limits are needed to protect human health. FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public health and safety have worked together and in connection with WHO to monitor developments and identify research needs related to RF biological effects. What levels of RF energy are considered safe? Various organizations and countries have developed standards for exposure to radiofrequency energy. These standards recommend safe levels of exposure for both the general public and for workers. In the United States, the FCC has used safety guidelines for RF environmental exposure since 1985. The NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP all have identified a whole-body Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) value of 4 watts per kilogram (4 W/kg) as a threshold level of exposure at which harmful biological effects may occur. Exposure guidelines in terms of field strength, power density and localized SAR were then derived from this threshold value. In addition, the NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP guidelines vary depending on the frequency of the RF exposure. This is due to the finding that whole-body human absorption of RF energy varies with the frequency of the RF signal. The most restrictive limits on whole-body exposure are in the frequency range of 30-300 MHz where the human body absorbs RF energy most efficiently. For products that only expose part of the body, such as wireless smartphones, exposure limits in terms of SAR only are specified. The exposure limits used by the FCC are expressed in terms of SAR, electric and magnetic field strength, and power density for transmitters operating at frequencies from 300 kHz to 100 GHz. The specific values can be found in two FCC bulletins, OET Bulletins 56 and 65: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#56; http:// www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#65. Why has the FCC adopted guidelines for RF exposure? The FCC authorizes and licenses products, transmitters, and facilities that generate RF and microwave radiation. It has jurisdiction over all transmitting services in the U.S. except those specifically operated by IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION 231 the Federal Government. While the FCC does not have the expertise to determine radiation exposure guidelines on its own, it does have the expertise and authority to recognize and adopt technically sound standards promulgated by other expert agencies and organizations, and has done so. (Our joint efforts with the FDA in developing this website is illustrative of the kind of inter-agency efforts and consultation we engage in regarding this health and safety issue.) Under the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA), the FCC has certain responsibilities to consider whether its actions will significantly affect the quality of the human environment. Therefore, FCC approval and licensing of transmitters and facilities must be evaluated for significant impact on the environment. Human exposure to RF radiation emitted by FCC-regulated transmitters is one of several factors that must be considered in such environmental evaluations. In 1996, the FCC revised its guidelines for RF exposure as a result of a multi-year proceeding and as required by the Telecommunications Act of 1996. Radio and television broadcast stations, satellite-earth stations, experimental radio stations and certain wireless communication facilities are required to undergo routine evaluation for RF compliance when they submit an application to the FCC for construction or modification of a transmitting facility or renewal of a license. Failure to comply with the FCC's RF exposure guidelines could lead to the preparation of a formal Environmental Assessment, possible Environmental Impact Statement and eventual rejection of an application. Technical guidelines for evaluating compliance with the FCC. RF safety requirements can be found in the FCC's OET Bulletin 65: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#65. Low-powered, intermittent, or inaccessible RF transmitters and facilities are normally excluded from the requirement for routine evaluation for RF exposure. These exclusions are based on standard calculations and measurement data indicating that a transmitting station or equipment operating under the conditions prescribed is unlikely to cause exposures in excess of the guidelines under normal conditions of use. Such exclusions are not exclusions from compliance, but, rather, exclusions from routine evaluation. The FCC's policies on RF exposure and categorical exclusion can be found in Section 1.1307(b) of the FCC's Rules and Regulations [(47 CFR 1.1307(b)]. 232 IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION How can I obtain the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) value for my wireless smartphone? The FCC requires that wireless smartphones sold in the United States demonstrate compliance with human exposure limits adopted by the FCC in 1996. The relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a wireless telephone-user is given by the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), as explained above. The FCC requires wireless smartphones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg) in terms of SAR. Information on SAR for a specific smartphone model can be obtained for many recently manufactured smartphones using the FCC identification (ID) number for that model. The FCC ID number is usually printed somewhere on the case of the smartphone. Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have the ID number, go to the following Web address: www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid. On this page, you will see instructions for entering the FCC ID number. Type the FCC ID number exactly as requested (the Grantee Code is the first three characters, the Equipment Product Code is the rest of the FCC ID number). Then click on “Start Search.” The “Grant of Equipment Authorization” for your telephone should appear. Read through the grant for the section on “SAR Compliance,” “Certification of Compliance with FCC Rules for RF Exposure” or similar language. This section should contain the value(s) for typical or maximum SAR for your smartphone. Smartphones and other products authorized since June 2, 2000, should have the maximum SAR levels noted directly on the “Grant of Equipment Authorization.” For smartphones and products authorized between about mid-1998 and June 2000, detailed information on SAR levels is typically found in the exhibits associated with the grant. Once a grant is accessed, the exhibits can be viewed by clicking on “View Exhibit.” Grants authorized prior to 1998 are not part of the electronic database but, rather, have been documented in the form of paper records. The FCC database does not list smartphones by model number. However, consumers may find SAR information from other sources as well. Some wireless smartphone manufacturers make SAR information available on their own Web sites. In addition, some non-government websites provide SARs for specific models of wireless smartphones. However, the FCC has not reviewed these sites and makes no guarantees of their accuracy. Finally, smartphones certified by the Cellular Telecommunications and Internet Association (CTIA) are required to provide SAR information to consumers in the instructional materials that come with the smartphones. consist of antennas and electronic equipment. Because the antennas need to be high in the air, they are often located on towers, poles, water tanks, or rooftops. Typical heights for freestanding base station towers are 50-200 feet. Do hands-free kits for wireless smartphones reduce risks from exposure to RF emissions? Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless smartphones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used with wireless smartphones for convenience and comfort. These systems reduce the absorption of RF energy in the head because the smartphone, which is the source of the RF emissions, will not be placed against the head. On the other hand, if the smartphone is mounted against the waist or other part of the body during use, then that part of the body will absorb more RF energy. Wireless smartphones marketed in the U.S. are required to meet safety requirements regardless of whether they are used against the head or against the body. Either configuration should result in compliance with the safety limit. Some base stations use antennas that look like poles, 10 to 15 feet in length, that are referred to as “omni-directional” antennas. These types of antennas are usually found in rural areas. In urban and suburban areas, wireless providers now more commonly use panel or sector antennas for their base stations. These antennas consist of rectangular panels, about 1 by 4 feet in dimension. The antennas are usually arranged in three groups of three antennas each. One antenna in each group is used to transmit signals to wireless smartphones, and the other two antennas in each group are used to receive signals from wireless smartphones. Do wireless smartphone accessories that claim to shield the head from RF radiation work? Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless smartphones, there is no reason to believe that accessories that claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special smartphone cases, while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the smartphone. Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike “hand-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may interfere with proper operation of the smartphone. The smartphone may be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in RF absorption. In February 2002, the Federal trade Commission (FTC) charged two companies that sold devices that claimed to protect wireless smartphone users from radiation with making false and unsubstantiated claims. According to FTC, these defendants lacked a reasonable basis to substantiate their claim. What are wireless telephone base stations? Fixed antennas used for wireless telecommunications are referred to as cellular base stations, cell stations, PCS (“Personal Communications Service”) stations or telephone transmission towers. These base stations At any base station site, the amount of RF energy produced depends on the number of radio channels (transmitters) per antenna and the power of each transmitter. Typically, 21 channels per antenna sector are available. For a typical cell site using sector antennas, each of the three transmitting antennas could be connected to up to 21 transmitters for a total of 63 transmitters. However, it is unlikely that all of the transmitters would be transmitting at the same time. When omni-directional antennas are used, a cellular base station could theoretically use up to 96 transmitters, but this would be very unusual, and, once again, it is unlikely that all transmitters would be in operation simultaneously. Base stations used for PCS communications generally require fewer transmitters than those used for cellular radio transmissions, since PCS carriers usually have a higher density of base station antenna sites. Are wireless telephone base stations safe? The electromagnetic RF signals transmitted from base station antennas stations travel toward the horizon in relatively narrow paths. For example, the radiation pattern for an antenna array mounted on a tower can be likened to a thin pancake centered around the antenna system. The individual pattern for a single array of sector antennas is wedge-shaped, like a piece of pie. As with all forms of electromagnetic energy, the power decreases rapidly as one moves away from the antenna. Therefore, RF exposure on the ground is much less than exposure very close to the antenna and in the path of the transmitted radio signal. In fact, ground-level exposure from such IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION 233 antennas is typically thousands of times less than the exposure levels recommended as safe by expert organizations. So exposure to nearby residents would be well within safety margins. Cellular and PCS base stations in the United States are required to comply with limits for exposure recommended by expert organizations and endorsed by government agencies responsible for health and safety. Measurements made near cellular and PCS base station antennas mounted on towers have confirmed that ground-level exposures are typically thousands of times less than the exposure limits adopted by the FCC. In fact, in order to be exposed to levels at or near the FCC limits for cellular or PCS frequencies an individual would essentially have to remain in the main transmitted radio signal (at the height of the antenna) and within a few feet from the antenna. This is, of course, very unlikely to occur. When cellular and PCS antennas are mounted on rooftops, RF levels on that roof or on others near by would probably be greater than those typically encountered on the ground. However, exposure levels approaching or exceeding safety guidelines should be encountered only very close to or directly in front of the antennas. In addition, for sector-type antennas, typically used for such rooftop base stations, RF levels to the side and in back of these antennas are insignificant. General guidelines on antenna installations and circumstances that might give rise to a concern about a facility's conformance with FCC regulations can be found in A Local Government Official's Guide to Transmitting Antenna RF Emission Safety: Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This Guide can be accessed at: http:// www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety. Who regulates exposure to radiation from microwave ovens, television sets and computer monitors? The Food and Drug Administration is responsible for protecting the public from harmful radiation emissions from these consumer products. Does the FCC routinely monitor radiofrequency radiation from antennas? The FCC does not have the resources or the personnel to routinely monitor the emissions for all the thousands of transmitters that are subject to FCC jurisdiction. However, the FCC does have measurement instrumentation for evaluating RF levels in areas that may be accessible to the public or to workers. If there is evidence for potential non-compliance with FCC exposure guidelines for a FCC-regulated facility, staff from the FCC's Office of Engineering and Technology or the FCC Enforcement Bureau can conduct an 234 IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION investigation, and, if appropriate, perform actual measurements. Circumstances that could give rise to a concern about a facility's conformance with FCC regulations can be found in A Local Government Official's Guide to Transmitting Antenna RF Emission Safety: Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This Guide can be accessed at: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety. Potential exposure problems should be brought to the FCC's attention by contacting the FCC RF Safety Program at: 202-418-2464 or by email: rfsafety@fcc.gov. Does the FCC maintain a database that includes information on the location and technical parameters of all the transmitting towers it regulates? Each of the FCC Bureaus maintains its own licensing database system for the service(s) it regulates (e.g., television, cellular service, satellite earth stations.) The FCC issues two types of licenses: site specific and market based. In the case of site specific licensed facilities, technical operating information is collected from the licensee as part of the licensing process. However, in the case of market based licensing (e.g., PCS, cellular), the licensee is granted the authority to operate a radio communications system in a geographic area using as many facilities as are required, and the licensee is not required to provide the FCC with specific location and operating parameters of these facilities. Information on site specific licensed facilities can be found in the “General Menu Reports” (GenMen) at http://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/cgi-bin/ ws.exe/genmen/index.hts. The various FCC Bureaus also publish on at least a weekly basis, bulk extracts of their licensing databases. Each licensing database has its own unique file structure. These extracts consist of multiple, very large files. The FCC's Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) maintains an index to these databases at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/ database/fadb.html. Entry points into the various databases include frequency, state/county, latitude/longitude, call-sign and licensee name. For further information on the Commission's existing databases, you can contact Donald Campbell at dcampbel@fcc.gov or 202-418-2405. Can local and state governmental bodies establish limits for RF exposure? Although some local and state governments have enacted rules and regulations about human exposure to RF energy in the past, the Telecommunications Act of 1996 requires the Federal Government to control human exposure to RF emissions. In particular, Section 704 of the Act states that, “No State or local government or instrumentality thereof may regulate the placement, construction, and modification of personal wireless service facilities on the basis of the environmental effects of radio frequency emissions to the extent that such facilities comply with the Commission's regulations concerning such emissions.” Further information on federal authority and FCC policy is available in a fact sheet from the FCC's Wireless Telecommunications Bureau at www.fcc.gov/wtb. Do wireless smartphones pose a health hazard? The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using wireless smartphones. There is no proof, however, that wireless smartphones are absolutely safe. Wireless smartphones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining the reasons for inconsistent results. What is FDA's role concerning the safety of wireless smartphones? Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless smartphones before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if wireless smartphones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless smartphones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the smartphones so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA has urged the wireless smartphone industry to take a number of steps, including the following: • Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by wireless smartphones; • Design wireless smartphones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function; and • Cooperate in providing users of wireless smartphones with the best possible information on possible effects of wireless smartphone use on human health FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies belong to this working group: National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Environmental Protection Agency Federal Communications Commission Occupational Safety and Health Administration National Telecommunications and Information Administration The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency working group activities, as well. FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless smartphones with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All smartphones that are sold in the United States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless smartphones. FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless smartphone networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do the wireless smartphones themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base stations are typically thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless smartphones. Base stations are thus not the primary subject of the safety questions discussed in this document. What kinds of smartphones are the subject of this update? The term “wireless smartphone” refers here to hand-held wireless smartphones with built-in antennas, often called “cell,” “mobile,” or “PCS” smartphones. These types of wireless smartphones can expose the user to measurable radiofrequency energy (RF) because of the short distance between the smartphone and the user's head. These RF exposures are limited by Federal Communications IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION 235 Commission safety guidelines that were developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health and safety agencies. When the smartphone is located at greater distances from the user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source. The so-called “cordless smartphones,” which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at far lower power levels, and thus produce RF exposures well within the FCC's compliance limits. What are the results of the research done already? The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and many studies have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wireless smartphones have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals. However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had been genetically engineered or treated with cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These conditions are not similar to the conditions under which people use wireless smartphones, so we don't know with certainty what the results of such studies mean for human health. Three large epidemiology studies have been published since December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any possible association between the use of wireless smartphones and primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma, tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful health effects from wireless smartphone RF exposures. However, none of the studies can answer questions about long-term exposures, since the average period of smartphone use in these studies was around three years. What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure from wireless smartphones poses a health risk? A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of people actually using wireless smartphones would provide some of the data that are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could be completed in a 236 IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION few years. However, very large numbers of animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicable to human populations, but 10 or more years' follow-up may be needed to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer. This is because the interval between the time of exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop - if they do - may be many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF exposure during day-to-day use of wireless smartphones. Many factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the smartphone is held, or which model of smartphone is used. What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible health effects of wireless smartphone RF? FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with groups of investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are conducted to address important questions about the effects of exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of public information documents on EMF issues. FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless smartphone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to independent investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies and studies of wireless smartphone users. The CRADA will also include a broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the latest research developments around the world. What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to radiofrequency energy from my wireless smartphone? If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a wireless smartphone will reduce RF exposure. If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless smartphone every day, you could place more distance between your body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless smartphone away from your body or use a wireless smartphone connected to a remote antenna. Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless smartphones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless smartphone use. What about children using wireless smartphones? The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless smartphones, including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless smartphones. Reducing the time of wireless smartphone use and increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure. Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless smartphones at all. For example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that using a wireless smartphone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless smartphone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. What about wireless smartphone interference with medical equipment? Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless smartphones can interact with some electronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method to measure electromagnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test method is now part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the Advancement of Medical instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical device manufacturers, and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless smartphone EMI. FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless smartphones and helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless smartphones so that no interference occurs when a person uses a “compatible” smartphone and a “compatible” hearing aid at the same time. This standard was approved by the IEEE in 2000. FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless smartphones for possible interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful interference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess the interference and work to resolve the problem. Which other federal agencies have responsibilities related to potential RF health effects? Certain agencies in the Federal Government have been involved in monitoring, researching or regulating issues related to human exposure to RF radiation. These agencies include the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), the National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA) and the Department of Defense (DOD). By authority of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968, the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the FDA develops performance standards for the emission of radiation from electronic products including X-ray equipment, other medical devices, television sets, microwave ovens, laser products and sunlamps. The CDRH established a product performance standard for microwave ovens in 1971 limiting the amount of RF leakage from ovens. However, the CDRH has not adopted performance standards for other RF-emitting products. The FDA is, however, the lead federal health agency in monitoring the latest research developments and advising other agencies with respect to the safety of RF-emitting products used by the public, such as cellular and PCS smartphones. IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION 237 The FDA's microwave oven standard is an emission standard (as opposed to an exposure standard) that allows specific levels of microwave leakage (measured at five centimeters from the oven surface). The standard also requires ovens to have two independent interlock systems that prevent the oven from generating microwaves the moment that the latch is released or the door of the oven is opened. The FDA has stated that ovens that meet its standards and are used according to the manufacturer's recommendations are safe for consumer and industrial use. More information is available from: www.fda.gov/cdrh. The EPA has, in the past, considered developing federal guidelines for public exposure to RF radiation. However, EPA activities related to RF safety and health are presently limited to advisory functions. For example, the EPA now chairs an Inter-agency Radiofrequency Working Group, which coordinates RF health-related activities among the various federal agencies with health or regulatory responsibilities in this area. OSHA is responsible for protecting workers from exposure to hazardous chemical and physical agents. In 1971, OSHA issued a protection guide for exposure of workers to RF radiation [29 CFR 1910.97]. However, this guide was later ruled to be only advisory and not mandatory. Moreover, it was based on an earlier RF exposure standard that has now been revised. At the present time, OSHA uses the IEEE and/or FCC exposure guidelines for enforcement purposes under OSHA's “general duty clause” (for more information see: http://www.osha-slc.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html. NIOSH is part of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. It conducts research and investigations into issues related to occupational exposure to chemical and physical agents. NIOSH has, in the past, undertaken to develop RF exposure guidelines for workers, but final guidelines were never adopted by the agency. NIOSH conducts safety-related RF studies through its Physical Agents Effects Branch in Cincinnati, Ohio. The NTIA is an agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce and is responsible for authorizing Federal Government use of the RF electromagnetic spectrum. Like the FCC, the NTIA also has NEPA responsibilities and has considered adopting guidelines for evaluating RF exposure from U.S. Government transmitters such as radar and military facilities. 238 IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION The Department of Defense (DOD) has conducted research on the biological effects of RF energy for a number of years. This research is now conducted primarily at the U.S. Air Force Research Laboratory located at Brooks Air Force Base, Texas. The DOD Web site for RF biological effects information is listed with other sites in conjunction with a question on other sources of information, below. Who funds and carries out research on the biological effects of RF energy? Research into possible biological effects of RF energy is carried out in laboratories in the United States and around the world. In the U.S., most research has been funded by the Department of Defense, due to the extensive military use of RF equipment such as radar and high-powered radio transmitters. In addition, some federal agencies responsible for health and safety, such as the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA), have sponsored and conducted research in this area. At the present time, most of the non-military research on biological effects of RF energy in the U.S. is being funded by industry organizations. More research is being carried out overseas, particularly in Europe. In 1996, the World Health Organization (WHO) established the International EMF Project to review the scientific literature and work towards resolution of health concerns over the use of RF technology. WHO maintains a Web site that provides extensive information on this project and about RF biological effects and research (www.who.ch/peh-emf). FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public health and safety have worked together and in connection with WHO to monitor developments and identify research needs related to RF biological effects. How does FCC Audit Cell Smartphone RF? After FCC grants permission for a particular cellular telephone to be marketed, FCC will occasionally conduct “post-grant” testing to determine whether production versions of the smartphone are being produced to conform with FCC regulatory requirements. The manufacturer of a cell smartphone that does not meet FCC's regulatory requirements may be required to remove the cell smartphone from use and to refund the purchase price or provide a replacement smartphone, and may be subject to civil or criminal penalties. In addition, if the cell smartphone presents a risk of injury to the user, FDA may also take regulatory action. The most important post-grant test, from a consumer's perspective, is testing of the RF emissions of the smartphone. FCC measures the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of the smartphone, following a very rigorous testing protocol. As is true for nearly any scientific measurement, there is a possibility that the test measurement may be less than or greater than the actual RF emitted by the smartphone. This difference between the RF test measurement and actual RF emission is because test measurements are limited by instrument accuracy, because test measurement and actual use environments are different, and other variable factors. This inherent variability is known as “measurement uncertainty.” When FCC conducts post-grant testing of a cell smartphone, FCC takes into account any measurement uncertainty to when determining whether regulatory action is appropriate. This approach ensures that when FCC takes regulatory action, it will have a sound, defensible scientific basis. FDA scientific staff reviewed the methodology used by FCC to measure cell smartphone RF, and agreed it is an acceptable approach, given our current understanding of the risks presented by cellular smartphone RF emissions. RF emissions from cellular smartphones have not been shown to present a risk of injury to the user when the measured SAR is less than the safety limits set by FCC (an SAR of 1.6 w/kg). Even in a case where the maximum measurement uncertainty permitted by current measurement standards was added to the maximum permissible SAR, the resulting SAR value would be well below any level known to produce an acute effect. Consequently, FCC's approach with measurement uncertainty will not result in consumers being exposed to any known risk from the RF emitted by cellular telephones. FDA will continue to monitor studies and literature reports concerning acute effects of cell smartphone RF, and concerning chronic effects of long-term exposure to cellular telephone RF (that is, the risks from using a cell smartphone for many years). If new information leads FDA to believe that a change to FCC's measurement policy may be appropriate, FDA will contact FCC and both agencies will work together to develop a mutually-acceptable approach. FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Your Treosmartphone is compliant with the FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) requirements. For additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this product, please refer to www.palm.com/treoHAC. Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm® Device Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence. Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock— the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity. ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your Palm® device, from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your smartphone, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur. Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the following: • Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground. For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body. • Increase the relative humidity of your environment. • Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats. IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION 239 Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following: • Low relative humidity. • Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton.) • The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect electronic devices. While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD. Precaution against hearing loss Protect your hearing. Listening to this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your hearing. A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre site web www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations. Conseils d'utilisation pour réduire le niveau d'exposition aux rayonnements: Utiliser le plus souvent possible les kits piétons (oreillettes), notamment en cas d'usage fréquent ou prolongé du téléphone mobile Ils apportent en outre un plus grand confort d’utilisation. Eloigner le téléphone mobile de certaines zones sensibles telles que le ventre chez les femmes enceintes ou le bas-ventre chez les adolescents, plus particulièrement lors d’une communication. Utiliser votre téléphone mobile dans de bonnes conditions de réception. Celle-ci est indiquée sur l’écran de votre téléphone par la matérialisation de barrettes. 3 ou 4 barrettes, la réception est de bonne qualité pour passer vos communications. Ce n'est pas toujours le cas dans certaines zones ou situations, notamment les parking souterrains, les ascenseurs, en train ou en voiture ou tout simplement dans un secteur mal couvert par le réseau. Mesures touchant à la sécurité: Dans certains lieux ou situations, tels que les avions, les hôpitaux, les stations-service et les garages professionnels, l'usage du téléphone est interdit. Il est donc impératif de respecter strictement les consignes de sécurité propres à chacune de ces situations et d’éteindre votre téléphone lorsque cela est requis. Par ailleurs pour éviter les risques d’interférences, les personnes porteuses d’implants électroniques (stimulateurs cardiaques, pompes à insuline, neurostimulateurs.) doivent conserver une distance de 15 cm entre le mobile et l’implant et ne l’utiliser que du côté opposé au côté où celui-ci est situé. Waste disposal Please recycle appropriately. For appropriate recycling and disposal instructions please visit: www.palm.com/ environment. Précautions d'usage de votre téléphone mobile Le taux de DAS(1) (Débit d’Absorption Spécifique) de votre Treo 700P smartphone est 0,896 w/kg 240 IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION Téléphoner en conduisant, même avec des équipements qui ne sont pas interdits par la réglementation, est dangereux car il augmente potentiellement le risque d’accident provenant de la distraction créée par la conversation elle même. Aussi, est-il recommandé de ne jamais téléphoner en conduisant et de considérer que l’utilisation d’un kit mains-libres n’est pas une solution. (1) Valeur DAS la plus élevée pour ce modèle de téléphone et pour une utilisation à l’oreille, communiquée par le constructeur. Le DAS, exprimé en w/kg, quantifie le niveau d’exposition aux ondes électromagnétiques et permet de vérifier la conformité des mobiles à la réglementation française et européenne qui impose que celui-ci soit inférieur à 2w/kg. Specifications Radio Phone features • CDMA 800MHz (digital cellular), 1900MHz (PCS), and 1400MHz (GPS) • EVDO and 1xRTT • Speakerphone • Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 3 or 4-barrel connector) • Microphone mute option • TTY/TDD compatible • 3-way calling Processor technology Intel XScale® processor, 312MHz Expansion SD/MultiMediaCard/SDIO card slot Battery • Rechargeable lithium ion • Removable for replacement • 3.5 hours full charge time Palm OS® version Palm OS 5.4.9 Camera • Still image capture resolution (1280 x 1024), 1.3 megapixel • 2x digital zoom • Video capture resolution (352 x 288) • Automatic light balance SPECIFICATIONS 241 Size 5.08 in. x 2.28 in. x 0.89 in. (129mm x 58mm x 22.5mm) with antenna Weight 6.4 ounces (180 grams) Connectivity • IR • Bluetooth® wireless technology (1.2 compliant) • Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus) • 65,536 colors (16-bit color) • User-adjustable brightness • Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator • Backlight for low lighting conditions • Phone (including Palm OS® Favorites, Dial Pad) Display Keyboard Included software • System requirements 242 SPECIFICATIONS Pics&Videos (includes camera and camcorder) • Messaging (text) • Web browser (Internet) • Pocket Tunes™ • Calendar • Contacts • Memos • Tasks • Voice Memo • Documents-To-Go® • Calculator Basic and Advanced • World Clock • Palm® Desktop software and HotSync® manager • Windows 2000 or XP with USB port • Mac OS 10.2 –10.3 with USB port • Later versions may also be supported Operating and storage temperature range • 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C) • 5% to 90% relative humidity (RH) SPECIFICATIONS 243 244 SPECIFICATIONS Index SYMBOLS ! in Tasks list 144 NUMERICS 1xRTT (single carrier) radio transmission technology 225 1XRTT connections 218 troubleshooting 216 1XRTT icon 97 1XRTT technology 69 1xRTT technology 69 24-hour clock 181 3G2 files 118, 121 3GP files 118 5-way navigator 5, 23, 24, 187 A AC charger 8 accented characters 30, 31 Access Powered devices 164, 208, 223 accessing Alert screen 155 alternate character list 31 alternate characters 29 application menus 26 applications 33, 47 calculator 156 Call Log 42 command buttons 25 Compose dialog box 88 corporate servers 194 Dial Pad 39, 46, 64 email 75–78, 78–87, 194 Favorites pages 41 files 149, 194 HotSync Manager 170 information 188 items on expansion cards 174 items on pick lists 27 Palm online support 223 Pocket Tunes 126 Quick Tour 223 secure websites 97, 219 web browser 32, 97, 98 web pages 97, 99, 217 World Clock 141 accessories 5, 172, 233 Account Setup command 77 accounts See also email accounts conference calls and 50 corporate mail servers and 194 forwarding calls and 51 getting support for 223 setting preferences for 84 voicemail and 44 Accounts command 84 Acrobat file formats 149 activating items on screen 25 smartphone device 11 Active Call View screen 45, 47, 49 active calls. See phone calls Add Bookmark command 99 Add Call button 46, 49 Add Contact command 48 Add Favorites dialog box 53 Add New Number prompt 48 Add Song button 127 Add to album command 120 adding accessories 5, 172 additional security 191 attachments 79–80 Bluetooth devices 57–58, 107 bookmarks 99 business cards 132 INDEX 245 caller ID photos 62, 131 captions to photos 114, 120 categories for applications 183 cities to World Clock 142 contacts 131 email addresses 78 emoticons 88 events 134, 136 expansion cards 172 favorite buttons 52–54 hands-free devices 59 memos 150 multiple recipients 54, 88 partnerships 58, 106 passwords 189, 190 phone numbers 48 pictures to albums 120 playlists 127, 128 private entries 190 QuickText phrases 88, 89 signatures 87 tasks 142, 143 TTY/TDD devices 68 videos to albums 120 voice memos 151 wallpaper 121 Address Bar pick list 99 246 INDEX addresses adding multiple recipients to 54, 88 assigning to favorite buttons 54 highlighting email 25 sending email and 78 synchronizing 209 text messages and 88, 90 viewing website 104 web links and 97 adjusting screen brightness 180, 193 adjusting volume alarm tones 140 music 126 phone calls 11, 62, 212 ringer 62 video clips 115 voice memos 152 Advanced Mode (calculator) 156, 157 Advanced Mode command 156 agenda lists 133 Agenda View 64, 133, 138 Alarm check box 135 alarm clock 142 Alarm Sound pick list 140, 146 alarm tones 140 alarms See also alerts adding to calendar 135, 140 adding to tasks 143, 146 recording sounds for 140 setting for clock 142 Album command 120 Album list 117, 119, 120 albums. See photo albums; video albums alert icon 70 Alert screen 44, 90, 135, 155 Alert Sound pick list 85 alert tones 61, 62, 85, 93 alerts See also alarms clearing 155 displaying 155 including message text in 92 receiving messages and 85 responding to 44, 90 aligning the screen 182 Alt key 30, 225 alternate characters 30, 31 alternate characters list 31 anniversaries 136 Answer button 43 answering phone calls 43, 46 antenna 7, 229 applets 97 application buttons 32 application categories 33 application list view 183 Application pick list 179 application preferences 183, 185 applications See also specific built-in applications accessing 33 assigning to Quick Keys 54 associating with buttons 54, 184 beaming 165 categorizing 183 caution for 174, 197 changing screen fonts for 180 closing 32 copying 174 copying text to 103 customizing 182–183 deleting 14, 160, 220 disabling synchronization for 166 downloading 102, 159 finding text in 155 getting help with 159 installing 157–159, 197, 226 managing 149 moving around in 21 opening 5, 32, 33, 47, 173 playing music and 127 running on expansion cards 219 sending over Bluetooth connections 162 setting default 185 switching 47 synchronization defaults for 18 transferring 13, 14, 163, 165, 174 troubleshooting 197 viewing information about 161 viewing menus for 26 viewing tips for 223 Applications button 5, 33, 37 Applications View defined 225 displaying applications in 183 opening applications and 32, 173 overview 33 appointments 134, 210 See also events Archive folder 160 area conversions 157 arrow icons 23 ASF files 118 Attach Signature check box 87 attachments adding 79–80 displaying 82 downloading 82 multiple files and 80 pictures as 79, 114 removing 79 storing large 220 supported formats for 149 video clips as 79, 115 voice memos as 152 attendee information 137 INDEX 247 audio 179 See also music; voice memos Audio Caption command 114 audio captions adding 114, 120 background music and 119 playing 117 Audio icon 117 Auto answer pick list 59 Auto Lock Device box 189 Auto naming pick list 116 Auto Sync dialog box 84 auto sync failures 85 Auto-complete check box 105 Auto-hide Toolbar option 118 Auto-Keyguard pick list 186 automated voicemail systems 44 automatic shut-off 193, 225 automating tasks 52 Auto-off After pick list 193 auto-off interval 225 AVI files 118 248 INDEX B Background check box 138 background music 119 backgrounds 64, 138 backing up information 14, 18, 201 backlight (keyboard) 29, 180, 193 backlight icon 180 Backspace key 28 Backup folder 160, 198 backup folders 207, 221 Basic Mode (calculator) 156 Basic Mode command 156 basics 223 battery charging 8–9 displaying remaining power on 71 disposing 203 installing 7 maximizing life of 10, 38, 193 replacing 10, 202 viewing status of 9 battery door release 6 battery icons 9, 70 Beam Business Card command 133 Beam Category command 164 Beam command 164, 165 Beam From pick list 165 Beam Receive pick list 194 Beam Status dialog box 165, 166 beaming battery life and 11 defined 225 overview 164–166 troubleshooting 164, 166 turning off 194 bell 155, 204 birthdays 136 blank screens 203 blank time slots 139 Blazer application See also web browser Blazer web browser 97, 219 See also web browser blinking bell 155, 204 Bluetooth application opening 57 sending from 162 setting up connections with 107, 108, 169 visibility options in 163 Bluetooth devices connecting to 57, 106– 109, 169 disabling or enabling 11, 59, 163 entering passkeys for 108, 109 incoming calls and 46 receiving information from 163 receiving phone calls and 58, 213 sending applications over 162 sending information over 162 setting up 57–58 synchronizing from 169, 170, 206 troubleshooting 214, 215 visibility options for 108 Bluetooth icon 57 Bluetooth icons (Phone) 70 BMP files 117 bonus software. See built-in applications Bookmark Page icon 101 bookmark pages 101 bookmarks 99–101, 164 customizing 101 Bookmarks View 100, 101 Bookmarks View icon 100 border glow (highlight) 24 brightness (screen) 11, 180, 193, 203 brightness duration (backlight) 180, 193 Brightness slider 193 browsing files 173 browsing the web. See web browsing built-in applications 157, 160, 223 See also applications; specific application built-in camera. See camera built-in security software 185 Business Card command 133 business cards 132, 164 buttons See also favorite buttons accessing command 25 changing defaults for 184 customizing 53, 184 disabling 47, 187 highlighted on screen 24 opening applications with 32 restoring factory defaults for 184 speed-dialing with 41, 53 Buttons Preferences screen 184 C cache 106, 220 calculator 30, 156 Calculator application 156– 157 Calculator icon 156 calculator modes 156 calendar See also Calendar application customizing 138–139 deleting events from 138 displaying 133 scheduling events for 134, 136 selecting alarm tones for 140 viewing tasks on 138 INDEX 249 Calendar application changing fonts for 180 changing views for 133 color-coding events 137 creating events 134, 136 displaying events 65 opening 32, 65 overview 133 setting alarms from 135 setting default view 138 setting display options in 138–139 synchronizing information in 18 Calendar button 5, 32, 133 Calendar views 134 call lists. See Call Log screen Call Log button 42 Call Log screen 42, 48 call waiting 49 Call Waiting dialog box 49 caller IDs 62, 63, 131 calls. See phone calls camcorder 115, 116 camcorder buttons 115 Camcorder icon 114 Camcorder View 114, 116, 120 250 INDEX camera 113, 116 troubleshooting 219 camera buttons (Camera View) 114 Camera icon 113 camera lens 6 Camera View 113, 116, 120 Cancel button (Active Call) 46 Cancel Spkr button 46 cancelling menu selection 26 Caps Lock indicator 29 Caps Lock mode 29 captions. See audio captions Card Info application 175, 176 Card Info button 175 card readers 125 carrying cases 204, 214 cascading style sheets 98, 105 categories adding ringtones for 64 applications and 33, 183 beaming and 164, 166 color-coding in 137 contacts and 132 events and 137, 139 memos and 151 naming 183 receiving from Bluetooth and 163 sending over Bluetooth connections 162 tasks and 143, 145, 146 Category command 183 category marker 139 Category pick list 139, 183 CDs 125 Center button 5 certificates 97 Change Lock Code option 188 changing bookmarks 100 button defaults 184 contact information 132 default applications 184 email accounts 83 events 137 favorite buttons 54 information 12 lock codes 188 owner information 191 passwords 190, 191 playlists 128 QuickText phrases 89 screen fonts 180 wallpaper 39 web page layouts 98 character entry 29, 31, 89 character limits memos 150 text messages 88 character searches 155 charge indicator 5, 9 charger cable 8 charging smartphone 8, 9, 10 smartphone battery 8–9 charging status 9 chat icon 91, 94 Chat page (Preferences) 92 Chat screen 91 chat sessions 91, 92 Chat view 91 Choose Songs button 126 Choose Songs command 127 city information 141, 142, 193 City pick list 141, 142 Clear Cache button 106 Clear Cookies button 106 clock 141, 181 See also World Clock closing application menus 26 applications 32 pick lists 27 color palette 116 color preferences 92, 116, 182 Color Theme Preferences screen 182 color-coded category marker 139 color-coding events 137 colored backgrounds 25 command buttons 25 commands. See menu items completed tasks 144, 146 completion dates 146 components (Treo smartphone) 1 Compose dialog box 88 Compress Day View check box 139 compressed files 158, 159 computers connecting smartphone to 17 downloading applications to 159 installing applications from 159 installing synchronization software on 16 quarantined files on 13, 15, 197 synchronizing with 13, 19 transferring information to 18 transferring multimedia to 121 transferring music from 124, 125 Con button (calculator) 157 conduits 135, 209 Conf button 50 conference calls 49, 50, 51 Confirm message deletion check box 92 conflicting applications 197 conflicting events 139 connecting headsets 55–56 to Bluetooth devices 57, 106–109 to computers 17 to virtual private networks 194 to websites 97, 106 INDEX 251 connections receiving information over Bluetooth 163 restrictions for 47 sending information over Bluetooth 162 setting up Bluetooth 169 troubleshooting 212, 216 TTY devices and 68 viewing status of 69, 216 constants 157 Contact Edit dialog box 131 contact names 40 contacts See also Contacts application adding photos to 121 assigning caller IDs to 63, 64 creating 131 deleting 132 editing 132 entering phone numbers for 48, 53 looking up 53 marking as private 132 scrolling through 24 searching for 40, 65, 132 synchronizing 131 252 INDEX viewing details about 41 Contacts application adding events to 136 changing fonts for 180 opening 131 synchronizing information in 18 Contacts button 131 Contacts list 25, 132 contracts 1 conversion functions (calculator) 156, 157 cookies 97, 105, 106 Copy button 120, 174 Copy command 103, 174 Copy Items dialog box 120 Copy items to pick list 120 Copy to command 119 Copy To pick list 174 copying applications 174 multimedia files 121, 122 music files 124 phone numbers 39 photos 119 text 103 user folders 198 videos 119 copyrighted materials 119 corporate email accounts 194 corporate servers 18 country-specific preferences. See language settings coupling 212 coverage area 10, 62, 68, 211 Coverage in/out pick list 62 crashes 204 Create chats from messages pick list 92 creating albums 120 audio captions 114, 120 bookmarks 99 business cards 132 caller ID photos 62, 131 categories for applications 183 chat sessions 91, 92 cities for World Clock 142 contacts 131 email 97 email messages 78 events 134, 136 memos 150 partnerships 58, 106 passwords 189, 190 playlists 127, 128 private entries 190 QuickText phrases 88, 89 signatures 87 speed-dial buttons 53 tasks 142, 143 text messages 88–89 voice memos 151 wallpaper 121 current date and time 141 current events 65 Current Privacy pick list 190, 191 customer service (wireless service provider) 223 customer support (Palm) 223 customizing applications 182–183 bookmarks 101 buttons 53, 184 calendar 138–139 camera 116 chat sessions 92 email 84–87 Keyguard 186 messaging options 92 smartphone 134, 177 system date and time 192 system sounds 179–180 tasks 145 web browser 104–106 D daily events 133 Daily Repeating Events check box 139 daily schedules 133 data. See information data service icons 216 data services 75, 97, 216 data transfer 69 databases 155 Date & Time Preferences screen 192 date formats 181 date preferences 192 Date stamp pick list 116 dates adding to photos 116 changing event 137 completed tasks and 144, 146 displaying 133, 141 selecting 134 setting due 143 setting system 192 sorting on 90 synchronizing 192 viewing due 144, 146 datestamps 116 Day display options 139 Day View 133, 139 daylight savings 141 Daylight Savings Time check box 142 decimal display formats (calculator) 157 decimal values 157, 181 decompression utilities 159 Default Alarm pick list 140 Default Apps Preferences screen 185 default settings 184 Default View pick list 138 degrees 157 delays 189 Delete command 83, 121, 160 delete confirmation messages 92 Delete Contact command 132 Delete events older than pick list 138 Delete From pick list 160 Delete Memo command 151 Delete Old command 83 INDEX 253 Delete Task command 145 deleting albums 120, 121 alerts 155 applications 14, 160, 220 attachments 79 bookmarks 101 contacts 132 cookies 106 device names 15 email 83, 220 events 138 favorite buttons 55 files 220 memos 151 messages 90, 92 music from playlists 128 passwords 190 photos 114, 120, 121 playlists 128 tasks 145 video clips 115, 120, 121 desktop software. See Palm Desktop software; software Details button 25 Details command 120 Device Name field 57 254 INDEX device names 15, 57, 164, 205, 225 Bluetooth devices and 57 devices entering passkeys and 58 devices. See Bluetooth devices; hands-free devices; smartphone Dial another call prompt 49 Dial button 42 Dial Extra Digits Automatically option 54 Dial Number dialog box 42 Dial Pad 30, 39, 64 Dial Pad button 46 Dial Preferences screen 65 dialing 39–42, 47, 53, 65, 103 dialog boxes accessing command buttons on 26 defined 225 getting help with 223 highlighted buttons in 24 digital cameras 117 See also camera dimming keyboard backlight 180, 193 Disable cookies check box 105 Disable JavaScript check box 105 disabling Add New Number prompt 48 Bluetooth devices 11, 59 cookies 105 Keyguard 37, 186 onscreen buttons 47, 187 synchronization 166 system sounds 179 the touchscreen 186, 187 web page images 98, 105 discovery 163 Discovery icon 107 discovery results list 107 Discovery Results screen 162, 163 discussion groups 223 disk space (smartphone) 219 Display my name in chat window as entry field 92 Display Options command 138 Display Options dialog box 138 displaying alerts 155 alternate characters 31 application information 161 application menus 26 applications 183 attachments 82 bookmarks 100 connection status 69, 216 contacts information 41 current date and time 141 due dates 144, 146 email messages 80, 81 error messages 222 event categories 139 events 65, 133, 138, 139 favorite buttons 41 items in pick lists 27 on-device guide 223 overdue tasks 133 personal calendar 133 photos 116, 117, 121 private entries 191 Quick Tour 223 signal strength 69 slide shows 118 tasks 138, 144, 146 unread messages 71, 133, 138 video clips 116, 118, 121 video recording time 114 voicemail messages 69 web addresses 104 web pages 97, 99 DOC files 149 documentation 2, 23, 75, 223 Documents application 149– 150 Documents icon 150 Documents To Go icon 150 Documents To Go software 149 downloading applications 102, 159 attachments 82 email messages 84 files 102, 158 ringtones 60 support information 223 Downloads bookmark 102 downward-pointing arrows 27 drafts 79, 89 Drafts button 79 drained battery icon 9 draining the battery 8, 9 Draw on Photo command 114 drawing tools 114 drivers 170 Due Date pick list 143 due dates 143, 146 dummy expansion card 172, 173 E earpiece 5, 46 eBooks 14 echoes 212 Edit Bookmark List dialog box 101 Edit Bookmarks command 100, 101 Edit Favorites Button command 54 Edit Favorites Pages command 53, 55 Edit Playlist dialog box 127, 128 edit screens 26 editing. See changing Effects pick list 116 INDEX 255 email accessing 75–78, 78–87, 194 adding multiple addresses to 54 adding signatures 87 attaching photos to 79, 114, 119 attaching ringtones 80 attaching videos to 79, 115, 119 attaching voice memos to 152 checking 71 creating 78, 97 customizing 84–87 defining favorite buttons for 54 deleting 83, 220 dialing from 41 downloading 84 forwarding 81 removing attachments for 79 replying to 81 requirements for 1 resending 79 retrieving 71, 80 scrolling 81 256 INDEX scrolling through 24 selecting default application for 185 sending 79, 90, 97 setting alerts for 85 sort options for 83 storing attachments 220 troubleshooting 215 viewing attachments 82 viewing status of 82 viewing unread messages for 71, 133, 138 email accounts changing 83 setting email preferences and 84 setting up 77, 87 email application 75 email applications 185, 218 email options 78, 83 emergency calls 66, 70, 187 emoticons 88 empty battery icon 9 empty time slots 139 emptying Trash folder 83 Enable background play check box 127 encryption 66, 97 Eng(x) display format 157 engineering notation 157 entering alternate characters 30, 31 decimal values 157, 181 device names 15, 57, 205 email addresses 78 events 134, 136 information 12, 191 lock codes 187, 188 numbers 29, 156 passkeys 57, 58, 108 passwords 45, 189, 190 phone numbers 39–42, 65, 187 tasks 142, 143 text 29, 150 URLs 104 web addresses 99 entries. See information entry screens 24, 190 envelope icon 83 erasing information 204 error messages 222 errors 207, 213, 222 Escalate ring tone volume check box 60 EVDO broadband technology 225 EVDO connections troubleshooting 216 viewing status of 69 EVDO icon 97 EVDO services 69 event conflicts 139 Event Details dialog box 135, 136, 137 events changing 137 color-coding 137 creating 134, 136 deleting 138 displaying 65, 133, 138, 139 scheduling repeating 136 setting alarms for 135, 140 synchronizing 133 troubleshooting 210–211 viewing categories of 139 viewing duration of 139 Evolution Data Optimized (EVDO) technology 225 Excel spreadsheets 73, 80, 149 Exchange ActiveSync 87 Exchange Address Book 209 Exchange Servers 87 expansion card slot 7, 172, 173 expansion cards accessing items on 174 adding 172 beaming from 165 caution for 14, 175 copying applications to 174, 175 copying music to 124 copying photos or videos to 119 deleting applications on 160 displaying albums on 117 downloading to 102 formatting 175 inserting 172 installing applications on 159 managing files on 173 moving files to 14 opening applications on 173, 219 opening files on 150 renaming 175 sending attachments to 81, 82 storing information on 14, 153, 172 transferring applications from 174 viewing information about 175 extensions (phone) 47, 53 Extra Digits button (Active Call View) 47 Extra Digits option (Add Favorites) 53 F fade setting 138 Fast Mode (web browser) 98, 105 favorite buttons adding 52–54 defined 226 deleting 55 dialing with 41 displaying 41 editing 54 organizing 55 specifying number of 65 transferring to smartphone 53 Favorites pages 41, 54, 65 INDEX 257 features (Treo smartphone) 5–7 feedback 212 fields 24, 27 file types pictures 117 videos 118 files accessing 149, 194 attaching to email 80 browsing 173 deleting 220 downloading 102, 158 moving to expansion cards 14 opening 150 saving 150 streaming 102 transferring 13, 220 Files application 173 financial calculator 156 financial functions 157 Find dialog box 155 Find More button 155 Find Text on Page command 104 finding chat sessions 91 contacts 40, 65, 132 258 INDEX specific characters 155 text 104, 155 web pages 99 firewalls 194 5-way navigator 5, 23, 24, 187 Fixed display format 157 Flash mode 51 flight mode 38 Float display format 157 folder pick list 83 folders 90, 205, 209 switching between email 83 Font command 98 Font size pick list 181 fonts 98, 180 forgetting passwords 189, 191 Format Card command 176 Formats Preferences screen 181 formatting expansion cards 175 formatting expansion cards 175 forums 223 forwarding email 81 forwarding phone calls 51 freeing disk space (smartphone) 219 freeing memory 106, 160, 220 freezes 197, 200 From pick list 174 full charge (battery) 8 G Game Volume pick list 179 getting started 2, 11, 223 GIF files 117 Glossary 225 GPS receivers 109 gradients 157 graphics. See images grouping photos or videos 117 groupware 87 H hands-free devices adding 59 connecting to 57 entering passkeys for 58 finding compatible 56 passkeys and 58 receiving phone calls and 58, 59 RF emissions and 233 switching between 59 troubleshooting 214–215 Hands-free Preferences screen 59 Hands-free Setup button 58 Hang Up All button 46 hanging up phone 46, 47, 49, 50 hard resets 189, 201 hardware 1 headphones 122 headset button 43, 56 headset jack 6 headsets See also hands-free devices Bluetooth devices and 57, 107 connecting to smartphone 55–56 entering passkeys for 109 receiving calls and 43, 46, 47 restrictions for 56 hearing-impaired services 67 help 195, 221, 223 hexadecimal characters 157 Hide Records option 190 hiding blank time slots 139 information in entry screens 190 Pics&Videos toolbar 118 private entries 190 web browser toolbar 103 High Priority command 89 highlighted buttons 24 highlighting applications 33 favorite buttons 41 items in pick lists 27 items on screen 24 menu items 26 phone numbers 42 text 25, 103 web links 25, 98 hints 189 History command 103 History list 103 Hold button 46, 49 holidays 136 home city 141 home page 104 home page icon 99, 104 HotSync Log 207 HotSync Manager 170, 226 HotSync Manager icon 170, 206 HotSync Setup button 169 HotSync technology 226 hypertext links. See web links I icons 99, 183 Ignore button 43 Ignore with Text button 44 image file types 102, 117 images disabling web page 98, 105 downloading 102 saving 102 selecting as wallpaper 64 transferring 14, 220 troubleshooting 218 importing phone numbers 144 Inbox 25, 80, 93 Inbox icons 82 Incoming dialog box 85 incoming messages 93, 94 incoming phone calls 43, 49, 60, 187 INDEX 259 incompatible applications 14, 197 Incompatible Apps directory 13 indicator light 5, 9 Info command 14, 161 Info screens 161 information accessing 188 backing up 14, 18, 201 beaming 164 changing 12 entering 12, 29–30, 191 erasing all 204 hard resets and 189 losing 175, 189, 201 marking as private 190– 191 masking 186, 190 protecting 185, 188 receiving over Bluetooth connections 163 sending over Bluetooth connections 162 storing 14, 153, 172, 220 synchronizing 13, 16, 18, 166–172, 208 transferring 13, 19, 164 260 INDEX updating 13, 18, 153 infrared port beaming from 165 defined 226 location of 7 synchronizing with 170, 206 infrared transmission 226 inserting expansion cards 172 installer 158 installing applications 157–159, 197, 226 bonus software 19, 158 Palm Desktop software 13, 159, 199 smartphone battery 7 synchronization software 13, 16 third-party applications 220 VPN clients 194 interference 213, 215 international characters. See alternate characters international clock. See World Clock international settings. See language settings Internet 38, 158 See also web browsing; websites Internet connections 98, 106 troubleshooting 216 interruptions 222 Into album pick list 120 invalid characters 89 IR port beaming from 165 defined 226 location of 7 synchronizing with 170, 206 items in pick lists 27 items on screen activating 25 highlighting 24 selecting 25 iTunes 123, 124, 126 J Java applets 97 JavaScript elements 105 JPG files 117 K keyboard accessing alternate characters on 29 dialing with 39 entering information from 29–30 illustrated 28 incremental searches from 40 locking 186 restoring factory defaults 184 keyboard backlight 29, 180, 193 Keyguard 186 Keyguard Preferences screen 186, 187 Known Caller pick list 61 L Label color pick list 92 language selection screen 8, 16 language settings 181, 199, 202 laptops 170, 171 large attachments 220 length functions 157 liability ii lightning bolt icons 9, 71 Li-Ion battery 226 See also battery links 90 See also web links list screens See also pick lists accessing command buttons on 25 highlighting items in 25 selecting items on 24 list view (applications) 183 listening to music 122, 126 voice captions 117 voice memos 152 Lithium Ion battery 226 See also battery loading web pages 90, 105, 218 Local button 170 locating chat sessions 91 contacts 40, 65, 132 specific characters 155 text 104, 155 web pages 99 Location icon 66, 70 Location On option 66 locations, disabling/enabling transmission of 66 Lock & Turn Off option 190 lock codes 187, 188 Lock Device dialog box 189 lock icon 98, 119, 163, 164 locking keyboard 186 phone 187–188 touch-sensitive features 187 Treo smartphone 188, 189 logging in to corporate servers 194 logic functions 157 looking up contacts 53 Lookup button 53 loops 200 losing information 175, 189, 201 passwords 189, 191 Lost Password option 191 low coverage areas 211 lowercase letters 29 INDEX 261 M M4V files 118 Mac systems installing applications from 159 installing synchronization software on 16 installing to expansion cards and 159 listening to music and 122 removing applications and 160 requirements for 13 sending email and 75, 84 synchronization defaults for 18 synchronizing with 168, 171, 206, 207 transferring music from 122, 124, 126 uninstalling desktop software and 207 upgrading and 15 user folders on 198 magnet 6 mail. See email Mail Service pick list 77 Manage Playlists command 127, 128 262 INDEX map (World Clock) 141 maps (web pages) 218 marking information as private 190–191 marking private contacts 132 Mask Records option 190 masks 186, 190 mathematical constants 157 mathematical functions 157 maximizing battery life 10, 38, 193 media features 10 Media Player 123, 125 memory 105, 138, 219 freeing 160, 220 memory slots (calculator) 157 memos See also notes creating 150 deleting 151 recording 151 scrolling through 24 Memos application changing fonts for 180 entering text in 150 opening 32, 150 overview 147 removing memos with 151 synchronizing information in 18 Memos button 150 Memos list 25 Menu button 5 menu items 26 Menu key 26, 28 menu shortcuts 26 menus 26 Message command 43 message lists 91 Message Tone pick list 93 messages adding multiple recipients for 54 arranging in folders 90 chat sessions and 91 checking status of 69, 71 creating 88 defining favorite buttons for 54 deleting 90, 92 dialing from 41 displaying status of 93 displaying unread 71, 133, 138 including in alerts 92 invalid characters in 89 receiving 89 retrieving 45, 69, 71 saving 89 scrolling through 24 selecting phone numbers in 42 sending 43, 88, 94 setting colors for 92 setting preferences for 92–93 specifying priority settings for 89 troubleshooting 216 Messages page (Preferences) 92 messaging 73 See also text messages Messaging application See also text messages changing fonts for 180 creating chat sessions from 91 creating text messages with 88 customizing 92 deleting messages in 91 opening 32 overview 88 sorting messages in 90 status indicators for 93 messaging applications 185 Messaging button 5, 32 Messaging Inbox 25 messaging preferences 92– 93 messaging services 1 messaging, troubleshooting 216 metric values 157 microphone 6, 47, 116 Microphone pick list 116 Microsoft Excel 73, 80 Microsoft Excel spreadsheets 149 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 87 Microsoft Exchange Servers 87, 131, 133 Microsoft Office Manager See Documents application Microsoft Outlook. See Outlook Microsoft Windows. See Windows systems Microsoft Word documents 73, 80, 149 mirror 6 mobile networks 38, 212 monitoring phone status 68 Month display options 139 Month View 133, 139 Move to command 120 moving bookmarks 101 favorite buttons 55 moving around on screen 21, 23 moving through web pages 98, 105 MP3 files 124 MP3 formats 122 MP4 files 118 MPEG-4 formats 121 MPG files 118 multi-connector pin 6 multimedia file types 118 multimedia files 117 MultiMediaCard cards 172 multiple recipients 54, 88 music adjusting volume 126 answering phone calls and 43 changing playlists for 128 INDEX 263 creating playlists for 127, 128 downloading 102 listening to 122, 126 memory consumption and 220 pausing 126 playing 102, 126, 127 selecting 126 stopping 127 uploading 124 music file types 102 music files 122, 124, 220 music subscription services 123 mute button 47 N names sorting on 90 synchronizing and 205 naming categories 183 device 15, 57, 205 messages for chat sessions 92 photo albums 113 photo groups 116 playlists 127 264 INDEX video albums 115 voice memos 151, 152 navigator buttons 5, 23, 24 See also 5-way navigator networks 38, 212, 216 New Bookmark dialog box 99 New button 25 New Message dialog box 79 Next Song button 126 No Service message 11, 38, 68 Normal Mode (web browser) 98, 105 Note button 132 notes See also memos adding to contact information 132 adding to events 138 adding to tasks 144 scrolling through 24 storing 150 notifications 44, 85 See also alerts number formats 181 numbers calculator display options for 157 entering from keyboard 29, 156 O offline synchronization 209 offline viewing (web) 100 OK button 25 online forums 223 online support 223 opening Alert screen 155 application menus 26 applications 5, 32, 33, 47, 173 Bookmarks View 100 Call Log 42 Dial Pad 39, 46, 64 email applications 218 files 150 History list 103 HotSync Manager 170 Pocket Tunes 126 Quick Tour 223 web browser 32, 97, 98 web pages 90, 105, 218 World Clock 141 operating system (smartphone) 13 operating systems (PCs) 13 Optimized Mode (web browser) 97, 98 Option key 28, 29, 32, 226 Option key indicator 29 Option Lock indicator 30 Option Lock mode 30, 88 options in pick lists 27 organizer features 10 Outbox 93 Outbox button 79 outgoing messages 94 outgoing phone calls 49 Outlook duplicate entries in 209 entering information with 12 multiple appointments and 134 multiple contacts and 131 synchronizing with 17, 18, 166, 209 time zones and 135 Outlook folders 209 overdue tasks 133, 138, 144 owner information 191 Owner Preferences screen 191, 192 P page icon 94 Page View 100, 103, 104 paired relationship. See partnerships Palm Desktop software defined 226 device names in 225 entering information with 12 forgetting passwords and 191 installing 13, 159, 199 multiple appointments and 134 multiple contacts and 131 reinstalling 209 synchronizing with 18, 206 time zones and 134 troubleshooting 199, 206 upgrades and 15 PALM folder 113, 114 Palm online support 223 Palm OS software 13 Palm OS-compatible applications 158 Palm Software Installation CD 2, 16 paper clip icon 79, 82 paragraphs, selecting 25 partial battery icon 9 partnerships 58, 106, 227 passkeys 57, 58, 108 Password box 189, 191 password hints 189 passwords caution for 190 changing 190, 191 deleting 190 dialing 47, 53 email and 77, 78 entering 45 forgetting 189, 191 owner information and 191 private entries and 186, 190 smartphone and 189 Paste command 39, 103 pasting phone numbers 39 text 103 Pause button 126 pausing music 126 streamed content 103 video playback 116, 118 INDEX 265 video recording 116 voice memos 151, 152 PCs. See personal computers PDB (Palm OS) databases 158 PDF files 80, 149 pending alerts 90 pending messages 91, 94 personal computers connecting smartphone to 17 downloading applications to 159 installing applications from 159 installing synchronization software on 16 quarantined files on 13, 15, 197 synchronizing with 13, 19 transferring information to 18 transferring multimedia to 121 transferring music from 124, 125 266 INDEX personal information 129, 185, 188, 191 See also information personal information managers 199, 227 personal schedules 133 personalizing smartphone 134, 177 See also preferences phone See also phone calls answering 43, 46 conference calls and 50, 51 dialing 39–42, 47, 53, 103 dialing preferences for 65 documentation conventions for 37 getting started with 11 hands-free devices and 55, 58, 59 hanging up 46, 47, 49, 50 locking 187–188 maximizing battery life and 38 privacy settings for 66 selecting alert tones for 61, 62 selecting ringtones for 60, 61 service carrier for 1 silencing ringer for 44, 179 troubleshooting 211–214 turning on and off 37, 38 viewing Call Log for 42 viewing status of 68 Phone application accessing Dial Pad in 39, 46, 64 adding caller IDs 62, 63 customizing 64 dialing from 42, 53 displaying events in 134 enabling privacy settings from 66 finding contacts from 40 opening 32, 38 overview 35 roaming settings 67 selecting wallpaper for 64, 121 setting alert tones 61 setting ringtones 60 setting TTY/TDD connections 68 status icons for 68–71 Phone button 5, 32 Phone Call screen 43 phone calls See also phone; phone numbers adding a second 48 adjusting volume for 11, 62, 212 automatically answering 60 disabling screen for 187 ending 46, 47, 49, 50 forwarding 51 keyboard backlight and 29 making 39, 46, 48, 51 placing on hold 46, 49 receiving 43, 49 restrictions for 47 running applications and 47 sending to voicemail 43 switching between active 50, 51 text messages and 90 transmitting location during 66 viewing details about 45 viewing status of 49 phone indicator. See indicator light Phone Info command 12 Phone Info screen 12 Phone Lock 187, 188 Phone Lock command 187 phone numbers adding 48 assigning prefix to 65 assigning to Quick Keys 53 copying 39 creating speed-dial buttons for 53 dialing extra digits with 47, 53 entering 39–42, 65, 187 getting device 12 highlighting 25 importing 144 pasting into Dial Pad 39 redialing most recent 42 saving 48 selecting 42 Phone Off message 11, 38, 68 phone on icon 69 Phone Preferences command 66 Phone Preferences screen 66, 68 photo albums 113, 117, 120 Photo Settings screen 116 photos See also pictures adding as wallpaper 121 adding caller ID 62, 131 adding captions to 114 adding to albums 120 adding to contacts 121 backing up 121 copying 119 deleting 114, 121 displaying information about 120 downloading 102 grouping 117 personalizing 114 positioning on screen 117 removing from albums 120, 121 rotating 121 saving 114 scrolling through 24 selecting as backgrounds 138 sending 79, 114, 119 setting default size 116 setting preferences for 116 INDEX 267 storing 111 taking 113, 219 viewing 116, 117, 121 pick lists 24, 27 Pics&Videos application copying pictures and videos in 119 creating wallpaper with 121 hiding toolbar in 118 opening 117 organizing media with 120 removing photos or videos from 121 rotating photos in 121 sending pictures or videos from 119 synchronizing information in 18 viewing pictures in 117 viewing slide shows in 118 viewing videos in 118 Pics&Videos icon 117 picture formats 117 Picture list 119 pictures 63, 113, 219 See also images; photos PIM applications 227 268 INDEX PIMs 199 plain text formats 81 Play button (Pocket Tunes) 126 Play icon (web browser) 102 playback pausing 103, 116, 118, 126 resuming 103, 127 stopping 127, 152 playing music 102, 126, 127 streamed content 102 video clips 115, 118 voice captions 117 voice memos 152 playlists 127–128 Playlists command 127 plug-ins 97 Pocket Tunes application changing playlists in 128 creating playlists in 127 opening 125 overview 123, 124 playing music from 126, 127 upgrading 123 POP protocols 86 ports 17 Power Preferences screen 11, 193 Power/End button 5, 37, 38 PowerPoint files 80, 149 PPT files 149 PRC (Palm OS) applications 158 precautions 239 predefined passkeys 58, 108, 109 preferences alarm tones 140 alert tones 61 applications 183, 185 buttons 184 calculator 157 camcorder 116 camera 116 country-specific 181 dialing 65 email 84, 85–87 hands-free devices 59 Keyguard 186 messaging 92–93 owner information 191 power settings 193 ringtones 60, 61 system colors 182 system date and time 192 system sounds 179 tasks 145 web pages 104–106 prefixes (phone numbers) 65 Prefs icon 191 preinstalled applications 157, 160, 223 See also applications; specific application presentation modules 172 presentations 149 preset delays 189 preset passkeys 58, 108, 109 pressing keyboard keys 29 pressing onscreen buttons 187 Previous Song button 126 primary applications 32 primary button assignments 184 prioritizing tasks 143, 146 priority levels 143, 146 priority settings 89 privacy flag 144 Privacy Mode check box 92 privacy settings 66 private entries 186, 190–191 programs. See applications progress indicator bar (video recording) 116 Prompt sounds pick list 116 protecting personal information 185, 188 protecting the screen 5, 204 protecting Treo smartphone 185–192 Protocol pick list 77 proxy servers 106 pTunes icon 125 punctuation marks 29, 31 Purge command 90, 138 Purge pick list 91 purging old information 14 Q quarantined files 13, 15, 197 quick buttons 32, 184 Quick Install 226 Quick Keys 53, 54 Quick Tour documentation 223 QuickText button 88 QuickText phrases 88, 89 R radians 157 radio frequency emissions 230 random number generator 157 range (Bluetooth devices) 162 Rcl button (calculator) 157 readjusting the screen 182 receiving phone calls 43, 49 recently viewed web page icon 99 rechargeable battery 1 See also battery rechargeable battery. See battery Record command 164 Record Completion Date check box 146 recorder 151 recording ringtones 61 sounds 140 videos 114 voice memos 151 Records button 161 recovering lost passwords 191 INDEX 269 recurring events. See repeating events red paper clip icon 79 Redial List screen 42 redialing most recent number 42 redirector (websites) 217 reducing storage space 14 Refresh command 217 Refresh icon (web pages) 98 refreshing web pages 98, 217 Regulatory Information 229 reinstalling Palm Desktop software 209 reinstalling third-party applications 197, 198, 201 Reminder Sound pick list 140 reminders 135, 142 Remove from album command 120 removing albums 120, 121 alerts 155 applications 14, 160, 220 attachments 79 bookmarks 101 contacts 132 cookies 106 270 INDEX device names 15 email 83, 220 events 138 expansion cards 172 favorite buttons 55 files 220 memos 151 messages 90, 92 music from playlists 128 passwords 190 photos 114, 120, 121 playlists 128 tasks 145 video clips 115, 120, 121 Rename Card command 175 Rename Memo command 152 renaming expansion cards 175 repeat intervals (events) 136 Repeat pick list 136, 140, 143 repeating alarms 140 repeating event icon 137 repeating events 136, 139 repeating tasks 143 replacing smartphone battery 10, 202 rescheduling events 137 reset button 201 resets 197, 199–202, 213, 222 caution for 189 resizing text 98 Resolution pick list 116 resolution settings (camera) 113 restoring factory defaults 184 restricting location information 66 resuming playback 103, 127 Return key 28 Review photos/videos pick list 116 RF emissions 230 ringer adjusting volume 62 silencing 44 turning off 179 Ringer switch 7, 38, 44, 179 ringtone file types 102 Ringtone pick list 63 ringtone preferences 60, 61 ringtones assigning to caller IDs 63, 132 downloading 60, 102 recording 61 sending with messages 80 setting for phone 61 setting phone 60, 61 roaming icon 69 Roaming message 68 Roaming pick list 61 Rotate command 121 rotating photos 121 S safety 229 Save As command 150 Save as Contact command 121 Save as Wallpaper command 121 Save List button 127 Save Page command 100 saved web page indicator 100 saving files 150 images 102 messages 89 phone numbers 48 photos 114 playlists 127 video clips 115 voice memos 151 web pages 100 schedules 133 scheduling events 134, 136 Sci(x) display format 157 scientific calculator 156 scientific notation 157 screen accessing command buttons on 25 activating items on 25 adjusting brightness 180, 193 aligning 182 automatically turning off 37, 193 battery life and 11 disabling 47, 186, 187 locking 187 moving around on 21, 23 protecting 5, 204 scrolling through 24 selecting items on 25, 27 troubleshooting 203–204 turning on or off 37, 193, 213 waking up 37, 46 screen fonts 180 screen protectors 204 scroll arrows 81 scroll bars 24 scrolling 24, 98 scrolling preferences 105 SD cards 172, 241 SD_Audio folder 125 SDIO (Secure Digital input/ output) cards 172, 241 search results 155 searching for contacts 40, 65, 132 specific characters 155 text 104, 155 secondary applications 32 secure connections 106 secure web pages 98 secure websites 97, 219 security 58, 191 Security button 189, 190 security certificates 97 Security dialog box 189 security software 185 Select Font dialog box 180 Select Media screen 79 selecting alarm tones 140 applications 33, 173, 174 chat sessions 91 dates 134 INDEX 271 favorite buttons 41 home city 141 items in pick lists 27 items on screen 25 menu items 26 music 126 phone numbers 42 photo albums 117, 119 playlists 127 songs 126 text 25, 105 time zones 134 video albums 118, 119 wallpaper 64, 121 web links 98 self-portrait mirror 6 Send button 5, 42, 79 Send command 162 Send From pick list 162 Send To Device droplet 125 sending applications over Bluetooth 162 calls to voicemail 43 email 79, 90, 97 information over Bluetooth 162 messages 43, 88, 94 photos 79, 114, 119 272 INDEX to chat rooms 91 video clips 115, 119 voice memos 152 Sent folder 93 servers 18, 194 service contracts 1 service providers 69, 75, 76 See also wireless service provider setting alarm clocks 142 passwords 45, 189, 190 setting up smartphone 2, 8 settings (incompatible) 197 Setup Devices button 107, 169 Setup Devices dialog box 57, 169 Shift/Find indicator 29 Shift/Find key 29, 155 Short Messaging Service (SMS) 227 shortcuts 26, 33 Show Address Bar check box 104 Show Calendar event check box 65, 134 Show Categories check box 146 Show Category Column check box 139 Show Category List check box 139 Show Completed Items check box 146 Show Due Dates check box 143, 146 Show Due Tasks check box 138 Show Favorite buttons check box 65 Show Messages check box 138 Show Priorities check box 146 Show Time Bars check box 139 Show timestamps in chats check box 92 Show Wallpaper option 64 Shutter sounds pick list 116 Side button 5, 126, 151, 184 Signal faded pick list 62 signal strength 62, 69, 211, 212, 213 signal strength indicator 38 signal-strength icon 38 signatures 87 silencing system sounds 44, 179 silencing the ringer 44 silent alarm 60, 62, 140 silent alerts 93 single carrier (1xRTT) radio transmission technology 225 SIT files 158, 159 Size button 14, 161 slide show options 119 slide shows 118 slider 24 Slideshow Setting command 119 smartphone activating 11 adding additional security for 191 battery life for 10 charging 8, 9, 10 components of 1 connecting Bluetooth devices to 106, 107, 108 connecting to PCs 17 customizing 134, 177 documentation conventions for 37 entering passkeys for 58 features illustrated 5–7 freeing memory for 160, 220 freeing space for 219 getting help with 195, 223 getting phone number for 12 hands-free devices compatible with 56 headsets compatible with 55 locking 188, 189 naming 15, 57, 205 navigating around on 21 overview 1 preset bookmarks on 101 preset buttons on 52 protecting 185–192 required items for 2 resetting 189, 199–202 setting up 8 specifications for 241 storing 5, 6 synchronization defaults for 18 synchronizing 13, 15 third-party applications and 220 transferring data to 14, 18 troubleshooting 195, 213, 223 turning on and off 8 unauthorized users and 185 updating information on 13, 18 viewing signal strength for 69 SMS messaging services 216, 227 See also text messages soft resets 166, 199 software See also Palm Desktop software accessing from web browser 102 included with smartphone 2 installing 19, 158 managing 149 reinstalling 209 synchronization defaults for 18 synchronizing information and 16 troubleshooting 199 INDEX 273 uninstalling 207 updating 197 software conflicts 207 songlists. See playlists songs. See music Sort by check box 146 Sort by Date command 90 Sort by Name command 90 Sort command 90 sorting messages 83 sorting messages 90 sorting tasks 146 Sound & Alerts Preferences screen 140, 179 Sound Off position (ringer) 44, 179 Sound On position (ringer) 179 sound preferences 140 sounds 140, 179 Sounds button 179 Space key 28 speaker 6 speakerphone 46, 47 troubleshooting 212 special characters 29, 31, 89 specifications 241 speech-impaired services 67 274 INDEX speed-dialing buttons 41, 53 Spkr-phone button 46 spreadsheets 73, 80, 149 Start With pick list 100 static 213, 215 statistical functions 157 statistical information 161 status icons (email) 82 status icons (phone) 68–71 stereo adapters 56, 122 stereo headphones 122 Sto button (calculator) 157 stopping music playback 127 video recording 115 voice memo playback 152 storage solutions 153 storage space 14 storing information 14, 153, 172, 220 music files 125 notes 150 photos 111, 113 smartphone 5, 6 videos 111, 114 streaming files 102 style sheets 98, 105 stylus 7, 23, 24, 27 submitting web forms 98 support (Palm) 223 support (wireless service provider) 223 symbols 29, 31, 89 Sync automatically check box 84 sync button 17, 19, 125 sync cable 9, 12, 17 sync. See synchronization; synchronizing synchronization ActiveSync and 87 Bluetooth devices and 106 device names and 15 overview 153 preparing for 13 recommendations for 18 removing applications and 160 selecting applications for 166–168 setting default application for 184 troubleshooting 204–211 upgrading and 15 synchronization applications (third-party) 201, 205, 208 synchronization software 13, 16, 199 synchronizing Calendar events 133 contacts 131 dates and time 192 information 13, 16, 18, 166–172, 208 photos and videos 121 time zones 192 with Bluetooth devices 169, 170 with Microsoft Outlook 166 system colors 182 system dates and time 141, 192 system errors 207, 213, 222 system requirements (PCs) 13 system resets 197, 200, 213, 222 system sounds 44, 179–180 System Volume pick list 179 T taking pictures 113, 219 Tap and Drag check box 105 tapping 23, 24, 25, 27, 204 Task Details dialog box 143 tasks See also events; Tasks application adding 142, 143 assigning to attachments 81, 82 checking off 144 deleting 145 displaying 133, 138, 144, 146 marking as private 144 prioritizing 143, 146 setting alarms for 143, 146 setting preferences for 145 viewing due dates for 144, 146 Tasks application changing fonts for 180 opening 142 synchronizing information in 18 Tasks button 142 Tasks list 25, 133, 144, 145 Tasks Preferences screen 145 TDD devices 67 technical support (Palm) 223 technical support (wireless service provider) 223 telecommunications devices 67 telephone calls. See phone; phone calls temperature conversions 157 text copying 103 entering 29, 150 finding 104, 155 highlighting 25, 103 resizing 98 selecting 25, 105 viewing against photos 138 text fields 24, 27 text message icon 94 text messages See also messages addressing 88 checking status of 70, 71 containing links 90 creating 88–89 deleting 90 dialing from 41 retrieving 71, 89 INDEX 275 selecting alert tones for 93 sending 44, 88, 89, 91 setting priority of 89 special characters and 89 troubleshooting 216 text messaging service 1 text messaging services 216 Text Telephone devices 67 third-party applications caution for 184, 197 compatibility with 13 deleting 14, 220 getting help with 159 installing 197, 220 reinstalling 197, 198, 201 searching in 155 transferring to expansion cards 14 troubleshooting 23, 200, 220–221 third-party utilities 14, 191 third-party VPN client software 194 three-way calling 49, 50, 51 Thumbnail View 117, 119, 121 TIF files 117 276 INDEX time displaying video recording 114 scheduling events and 134, 137 setting system 192 synchronizing 192 viewing 141 time bars 139 time formats 181 time preferences 192 time slots (calendar) 139 Time Zone pick list 134 time zones 135, 192, 210 Timed Events check box 139 timestamps 92 tips 223 Tips command 223 Tips icon 223 to do items. See tasks toolbars 103, 118 touchscreen. See screen Touchscreen Preferences screen 182 transmitting location 66 Trash folder 83 travel alarm 142 Treo 700p smartphone. See smartphone trigonometric functions 157 troubleshooting 195, 223 Trusted Device list 107, 108, 163 trusted devices 106 See also partnerships Trusted Devices button 107 Trusted Pairs. See partnerships TTY devices 67 TTY icon 68 TTY/TDD Mode icon 70 TTY/TDD pick list 68 turning on or off Caps Lock 29 keyboard backlight 29 Keyguard 37, 186 microphone 116 phone 37, 38 screen 37, 193, 213 smartphone 8 speakerphone 46 Typing starts contacts search option 65 U unauthorized users 185 Unfiled category 163, 166 uninstalling applications 160 Palm desktop software 207 third-party applications 200 Unknown Caller pick list 61 unlocking the keyboard 186 the phone 187, 188 Treo smartphone 189 unread messages 71, 93, 133, 138 untimed events 135, 136, 139 Untimed Events check box 139 updating application software 197 information 13, 18, 153 system date and time 141 upgrades 13–15, 53, 207 troubleshooting 197–198 uploading music files 124 uppercase letters 29 urgent messages 93 URLs 90, 104 See also web links USB hub 17 USB ports 17 Use color for pick list 92 user discussion groups 223 user folders 198, 205, 227 User Guide 223 usernames 77 V VersaMail documentation for 75 VersaMail application accessing email and 75, 215 adding attachments from 79–80 creating email messages from 78 customizing 84–87 displaying attachments with 82 Exchange ActiveSync accounts and 87 overview 75 responding to messages from 81 setting up accounts for 76, 77 sorting messages with 83 switching accounts from 83 Version button 161 version numbers 161 Vibrate pick list 60, 62, 140 vibrating alarm 60, 62, 140 video albums 115, 117, 120 video file types 102, 118 video recording screen 114 Video Settings screen 116 videos adding to albums 120 adjusting volume for 115 attaching to email 79, 115 backing up 121 copying 119 deleting 115, 121 displaying information about 120 downloading 102 grouping 117 jumping to specific sections of 116 pausing 116, 118 playing 102, 115, 118 recording 114 removing from albums 120, 121 saving 115 INDEX 277 sending 115, 119 setting default size of 116 setting preferences for 116 storing 111 viewing 116, 118, 121 View By pick list 183 viewing alerts 155 alternate characters 31 application information 161 application menus 26 applications 183 attachments 82 bookmarks 100 connection status 69, 216 contacts information 41 current date and time 141 due dates 144, 146 email messages 80, 81 error messages 222 event categories 139 events 65, 133, 138, 139 favorite buttons 41 items in pick lists 27 on-device guide 223 overdue tasks 133 personal calendar 133 278 INDEX photos 116, 117, 121 private entries 191 Quick Tour 223 signal strength 69 slide shows 118 tasks 138, 144, 146 unread messages 71, 133, 138 video clips 116, 118, 121 video recording time 114 voicemail messages 69 web addresses 104 web pages 97, 99 virtual private networks (VPNs) 194 Visibility pick list 108, 163 voice captions adding 114, 120 background music and 119 playing 117 Voice Memo application 147, 151–152 Voice Memo list 152 voice memos 151, 152 voice quality 212 voicemail checking 69 retrieving messages 45, 69 sending calls to 43 setting alert tones for 62 setting up 44 Voicemail Alert pick list 62 Voicemail button 44 Voicemail icon 44, 69 voicemail page icon 94 Voicemail screen 44 volume alarm tones 140 alert tones 62 music 126 phone 11, 62, 212 ringer 62 ringtones 60 video clips 115 voice memos 152 Volume button 5, 11, 62 volume conversions (calculator) 157 Volume pick list 60, 62 volume preferences 179 VPN client software 194 W waking up screen 37, 46 wallpaper 39, 64, 121 warranty 2 web addresses 99, 104 See also URLs; web links web browser accessing email providers and 75 auto-completion options for 105 beaming from 164 bookmarking and 99, 101 customizing 104–106 deleting cookies for 106 dialing phone numbers from 42, 103 hiding toolbar in 103 installing applications from 158 opening 32, 97, 98 overview 95, 97 restrictions for 97 selecting default views for 100 selecting home page for 104 streamed content and 103 troubleshooting 217 unsupported elements for 217 web browser application. See Blazer web browser; web browser web browser icons 98 web browsing See also web browser from smartphone 38, 97 memory consumption and 220 requirements for 1 secure sites and 97, 98 selecting default application for 185 troubleshooting 216–219 web browsing service 1 web forms 98 Web icon 98 web links assigning to favorite buttons 54 creating email from 97 highlighting 25 Palm online support 223 selecting 98 web pages accessing 97, 99, 217 bookmarking 99–101 caching 106, 220 changing fonts for 98, 180 changing layouts for 98 copying text from 103 dialing from 41 disabling images for 98, 105 displaying 97, 99 finding text on 104 loading 105, 218 locating most recent 99 opening from text messages 90 opening History list for 103 refreshing 98, 217 saving 100 scrolling 98, 105 selecting text on 103, 105 sending email from 97 setting initial view for 104 setting preferences for 104–106 viewing offline 100 web-based email 75 websites See also web browsing accessing 97, 99, 106, 219 displaying addresses for 104 INDEX 279 displaying recently visited 99 downloading files from 102 entering addresses for 99 opening Palm online support 223 redirectors and 217 transactions and 219 Week View 133 weekly events 133 weight conversions 157 Wide Page Mode 98 Windows systems installing applications from 159 installing to expansion cards and 159 listening to music and 123 removing applications and 160 requirements for 13 sending email and 84 280 INDEX synchronization defaults for 18 synchronizing with 167, 171, 206, 207 transferring music from 123, 125 wireless accounts. See accounts; wireless service provider wireless connections 95, 162 wireless devices. See Bluetooth devices hands-free devices; smartphone wireless features 10, 220 wireless service provider customer service for 223 onscreen message 68 preset bookmarks and 101 preset buttons and 52 smartphone requirements for 1 technical support for 223 troubleshooting Internet connections and 217 voicemail services and 44 wizards 158 WMA formats 123 Word documents 73, 80, 149 word searches 155 words, selecting 25 World Clock 141–142 World Clock icon 141 world map 141 Wrap Search check box 104 X XLS files 149 Y Year View 134 Z ZIP files 158, 159 zoom settings (camera) 113
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.1 Modify Date : 2006:08:18 12:40:06-07:00 Create Date : 2006:08:18 11:55:36Z Metadata Date : 2006:08:18 12:40:06-07:00 Format : application/pdf Title : Your Palm® Treo™ 700p Smartphone User Guide Creator : Palm, Inc. Description : Final, 081806 Document ID : uuid:37b5fc4b-d6f8-42dd-bc58-27490276239c Instance ID : uuid:43c7b861-ad9f-4183-9cbc-aa70e5e01d67 Page Count : 286 Page Layout : SinglePage Subject : Final, 081806 Author : PalmEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools